Skip to main content

Full text of "Modern geometry"

See other formats


H 


y1 


IN  MEMORIAM 
FLORIAN  CAJORl 


J>? 


MODERN     GEOMETRY 


CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS  WAREHOUSE, 

C.   F.  CLAY,  Manager. 

HonUon:    FETTER  LANE,  E.C. 

(f^Umiurgf):    100,  PRINCES  STREET. 


ILdpjig:    F.  A.  BROCKHAUS. 

Berlin:    A.  ASHER  AND  CO. 

i^eijj  lotfe :    G.  P.  PUTNAM'S  SONS. 

aSomfjag  mn  (Calcutta:    MACMILLAN  AND  CO.,  Ltd. 


[All  Bights  reserved] 


MODERN     GEOMETRY 


BY 


C.    GODFREY,    M.A. 


HEAD    MASTER    OF    THE    ROYAL    NAVAL    COLLEGE,    OSBORNE 

FORMERLY    SENIOR    MATHEMATICAL    MASTER    AT 

WINCHESTER    COLLEGE 

AND 

A.   W.    SIDDONS,    M.A, 

ASSISTANT    MASTER    AT    HARROW    SCHOOL 
LATE    FELLOW    OF   JESUS    COLLEGE,    CAMBRIDGE 


CAMBRIDGE 
AT  THE  University  Press 

1908 


PRINTED    BY   JOHN   CLAY,    M.A. 
AT   THE    UNIVERSITY   PRESS. 

CAJORl 


PEEFACE 

rriHE   present    volume   is   a   sequel   to    the   Elementary 
-^    Geometry  written  by  the  same  authors. 

It  covers  the  schedule  of  Modern  Plane  Geometry  required 
for  the  Special  Examination  in  Mathematics  for  the  Ordinary 
B.A.  Degree  at  Cambridge  ;  and  represents  what  we  take  to 
be  a  useful  course  for  any  student  of  Mathematics,  whether 
he  intends  to  read  for  Mathematical  Honours,  or  to  take 
up  Physics  or  Engineering.  For  those  who  ultimately  make 
a  special  study  of  Geometry,  this  book  would  serve  as  an 
introduction  to  more  advanced  treatises. 

Our  experience  tends  to  shew  that  boys  find  no  little 
difficulty,  at  the  outset,  in  mastering  the  ideas  of  Modern 
Plane  Geometry;  and,  especially,  in  solving  the  problems 
usually  set.  We  have  therefore  put  in  a  number  of  quite 
easy  exercises,  arranged  to  lead  by  easy  stages  to  the 
Scholarship  questions  at  the  end  of  Chapters. 

We  have  to  thank  Mr  H.  M.  Taylor  for  permission  to 
use  some  of  the  exercises  included  in  his  edition  of  Euclid. 

C.  G. 
A.  W.  S. 

June,  1908. 


918303 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE  SENSE   OF  A   LINE. 


Sense  of  a  line 
AB  +  BC  =  AC 
BA=  -AB  . 


AB  +  BC  +  CD  +  DE+EA  =  0 
AB=OB-OA       . 
OA  +  OB 


OC 

Sense  of  an  angle 


PAGE 

1 
2 
3 
3 
3 

3 
5 


CHAPTER  II. 


INFINITY. 

Infinity 

Point  at  infinity         .... 
Line  at  infinity  .... 

Circle  of  infinite  radius     . 


6 

7 

9 

10 


Vlll  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER   III. 

THE    CENTROID. 

PAGE 

Definition  of  centroid 11 

Theorem  1.  If  the  distance  of  two  points  P,  Q  from  a  line 
XY  be  yi,  y2  (sign  being  taken  into  account);  and  if  G  be 
taken  on  PQ  so  that  A .  PG  =  ^ .  GQ,  then  the  distance  of  G 
from  the  line  is 


h-\-k 
Theorem  2.     If  the  distances  of  points  Pi,  ...,  P„  from  a  line 
be  yi ,  ...tyn  (sign  being  taken  into  account),  the  distance 
of  the  centroid  G  from  the  line  is 


n 


12 


13 


Theorem  3.  If  the  coordinates  of  Pi,  P2,  ...,  P„,  with  respect 
to  two  axes  at  right  angles,  be  (^1,  yi)  {x2,  3/2)  (•^"s?  3/3)- •• 
(^„,  yn)  the  coordinates  of  the  centroid  are 

n  "*  n  '        '        ' 

Use  of  centroid  as  a  method  of  geometrical  proof  .         .  14 


14 


CHAPTER   IV. 

THE   TRIANGLE. 

Notation 16 

Theorem  4.    A  =  |6csinA 17 

Theorems.    -^  =  ^A^  =  ^-=2R 18 

sm  A      sin  B      sin  C 

Theorem  6.     a2  =  62  +  c2  — 26ccosA 19 

Theorem  7.     If  a  is  mid-point  of  BC,  then 

AB2+AC2  =  2Aa2  +  2Ba2  (Apollonius' theorem)      .         .  20 

Definition  of  concurrence,  coUinearity 22 

Definition  of  circumcircle,  circumcentre  .....  22 


CONTENTS  IX 

PAGE 

Theorem  8.  The  perpendicular  bisectors  of  the  sides  of  a 
triangle  are  concurrent ;  and  the  point  of  concurrence,  S, 
is  the  circumcentre 22 

Definition  of  in-circle,  in -centre 23 

Theorem  9.  The  internal  bisectors  of  the  angles  of  a  triangle 
are  concurrent ;  and  the  point  of  concurrence,  I,  is  the 
in-centre 23 

Definition  of  escribed  circle  or  ex-circle,  of  ex-centre      .         .  24 

Theorem  10.  The  internal  bisector  of  Z.A  and  the  external 
bisectors  of  Z.s  B  and  C  are  concurrent ;  and  the  point  of 
concurrence  is  the  ex-centre  li 24 

Theorem   11.     r  =  - 25 

s 

Theorem  12.    ri= 26 

s—a 

Theorem  13.  (i)  AYi  =  AZ^  =  s.  (ii)  AY  =  AZ=5-a. 
(iii)  YYi  =  ZZi  =  a.  (iv)  BX^^C\  =  s-c. 
(v)    XXi  =  c-6 27 

Definition  of  median,  medial  triangle       .....  29 

Lemma  1.     If  y,  /3  are  the  mid-points  of  AB  and  AC,  then  y/3 

is  parallel  to  BC  and  equal  to  ^BC  .         .         .         .  29 

Theorem  14.  The  medians  of  a  triangle  are  concurrent, 
and  each  median  is  trisected  at  the  point  of  concur- 
rence, G 30 

Centroid  of  triangle 30 

Theorem  15.  The  three  altitudes  of  a  triangle  are  con- 
current                  .         .         .         •         .  31 

Definition  of  orthocentre 31 

Definition  of  pedal  triangle 32 

Theorem  16.     If  AH  produced  meets  the  circumcircle  in  X, 

then  HD  =  DX 32 

Theorem  17.     AH  =  2Sa    .  .        .         .        .        .        .  33, 

Theorem    18.      The    points    H,    G,    S    are    collinear ;    and 

HG  =  2GS 34 


CONTENTS 


Theorem  19.     A  circle  whose  centre  is  the  mid-point  of  SH, 
and  whose  radius  is  ^R,  passes  through 
D,  E,  F,  the  feet  of  the  altitudes, 
a,  ^,  y,  the  mid-points  of  the  sides, 
P,  Q,  R,  the  mid-points  of  HA,  HB,  HC      . 

Nine-points  circle,  nine-points  centre        .... 

Theorem  20.  If  from  point  P,  a  point  on  the  circumcircle, 
perpendiculars  PL,  PM,  PN  be  drawn  to  the  sides  of  a 
triangle,  then  LMN  is  a  straight  line  (the  Simson  line) 

Exercises  on  Chapter  IV 


35 

36 


37 
39 


CHAPTER    V. 

THE   THEOKEMS   OF   CEVA  AND   MENELAUS. 

Lemma  2.     If  two  triangles  have  the  same  height,  their  areas 

are  to  one  another  in  the  ratio  of  their  bases  .         .  46 

Theorem  21.     (Ceva's  theorem.)    If  the  lines  joining  a  point  O 
to  the  vertices  of  a  triangle  ABC  meet  the  opposite  sides 

in   X,  Y,  Z,  then   t;;^;  •  tt;  •  ^-^=  - 1,  the  sense  of  lines 
CX     AY     3Z. 

being  taken  into  account 46 

Theorem  22.     (Converse  of  Ceva's  theorem.)    If  points  X,  Y,  Z 

are  taken  on  the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB  of  a  triangle,  such 

BX     CY    AZ 

tl^^t  r^  •  7^  •  s^  =  ~  Ij  *h®^  '^^^  AX,  BY,  CZ  concurrent  .  48 

CX    AY     BZ 

Theorem    23.      (Menelaus'    theorem.)      If    a    straight    line 

cuts   the    sides    of   a    triangle    ABC    in    L,    M,    N,    then 

BL    CM    AN       ,  ^     ^,  ...  1    .        ^  1 

^rr ' -m '  i^rr.= +^,  the   sense  of   lines    bemg  taken  uito 

CL    AM     BN  ° 

account        ..........  49 

Theorem   24.     (Converse   of  Menelaus'   theorem.)     If  points 
L,  M,  N  are  taken  on  the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB  of  a  triangle, 

BL    CM    AN 

such  that  ^^  .  -rj-z  .  ^xi=  +I5  tl^eii  ^^^  L,  M,  N  collinear    .  50 

\.y  L>      /\  iVI       DIN 

Exercises  on  Chapter  V .50 


CONTENTS  XI 

CHAPTER    VI. 

HARMONIC  SECTION: 

PAGE 

DeJ&nition    of    harmonic    section,   harmonic  range,   harmonic 

conjugates 53 

Definition  of  cross-ratio     ........  54 

Theorem  25.     If  {AB,  CD}  =  -  1,  then  ^  +  a^  =  ^     •         •  54 

Theorem  26.     If  AB  is  divided  harmonically  at  C,  D,  and  if  O 

is  the  mid-point  of  AB,  then  OC.OD  =  OB2     ...  55 

Definition  of  pencil,  vertex  of  pencil,  transversal    ...  56 

Theorem  27.  If  a  transversal  cuts  the  four  lines  of  a  pencil 
at  A,  C,  B,  D,  and  if  ACBD  is  a  harmonic  range,  then  any 
other  transversal  will  also  be  divided  harmonically  .  57 

Definition  of  harmonic  pencil 58 

Harmonic  range  with  one  point  at  infinity     ....  59 

Theorem  28.  The  internal  and  external  bisectors  of  an  angle 
are  harmonic  conjugates  with  respect  to  the  arms  of  the 
angle 59 

Theorem  29.  If  {AB,  CD}=  -1  and  O  is  a  point  outside  the 
line  such  that  Z.COD  is  a  right  angle,  then  OC,  CD  are 
the  bisectors  of  Z.AOB 59 

Exercises  on  Chapter  VI 60 


CHAPTER    VII. 

POLE   AND   POLAR. 

Definition  of  chord  of  contact 62 

Provisional  definition  of  pole  and  polar   .....  62 

Theorem  30.  If  the  line  joining  a  point  T  to  the  centre  C  of 
a  circle  cuts  the  chord  of  contact  of  T  in  N  and  the  circle 
in  A,  then  CN.CT  =  CA2 63 

Final  definition  of  pole  and  polar 63 


Xll  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Theorem  31.  If  a  straight  line  is  drawn  through  any  point 
to  cut  a  circle,  the  line  is  divided  harmonically  by  the 
circle,  the  point,  and  the  polar  of  the  point  with  respect  to 
the  circle     .         .■ 64 

Theorem  32.  If  the  polar  of  a  point  P  with  respect  to  a 
circle  passes  through  a  point  Q,  then  the  polar  of  Q  passes 
through  P 66 

Theorem  33.  Two  tangents  are  drawn  to  a  circle  from  a 
point  A  on  the  polar  of  a  point  B  ;  a  harmonic  pencil  is 
formed  by  the  two  tangents  from  A,  the  polar  of  B  and 
the  Hne  AB 68 

Case  of  circle  of  infinite  radius 69 

Exercises  on  Chapter  VII 69 

CHAPTER    VIII. 

SIMILITUDE   (pp.  71—75). 

CHAPTER    IX. 

MISCELLANEOUS   PROPERTIES   OF  THE   CIRCLE. 

Section  I.     Orthogonal  Circles. 

Definition  of  angles  at  which  two  curves  intersect    .         .  76 

Definition  of  orthogonal  circles 76 

Theorem  34.  If  two  circles  are  orthogonal,  a  tangent  to 
either  at  their  point  of  intersection  passes  through  the 
centre  of  the  other  .......  76 

Theorem  35.  The  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  radii  of  two 
orthogonal  circles  is  equal  to  the  square  on  the  distance 
between  their  centres      . 77 

Theorem  36.  Any  diameter  of  a  circle  which  cuts  an 
orthogonal  circle  is  divided  harmonically  by  the  ortho- 
gonal circle 77 

Section  II.    The  circle  op  Apollonius. 

Theorem  37.  If  a  point  P  moves  so  that  the  ratio  of  its 
distances  from  two  fixed  points  Q,  R  is  constant,  the 
locus  of  P  is  a  circle      .......  78 


CONTENTS  XIU 

PAGE 

Section  III.     Ptolemy's  Theorem. 

Theorem  38.  The  sum  of  the  rectangles  contained  by- 
opposite  sides  of  a  cyclic  quadrilateral  is  equal  to  the 
rectangle  contained  by  its  diagonals        ....  80 

Theorem  39.  The  rectangle  contained  by  the  diagonals  of 
a  quadrilateral  is  less  than  the  sum  of  the  rectangles 
contained  by  its  opposite  sides  unless  the  quadrilateral 
is  cyclic,  in  which  case  it  is  equal  to  that  sum        .         .  81 

Application  of  Ptolemy's  theorem  to  trigonometry    .         .  82 

Section  IV.     Contact  Problems 83 

Exercises  on  Chapter  IX 84 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE   RADICAL   AXIS:    COAXAL   CIRCLES. 

Definition  of  radical  axis 87 

Theorem  40.     The  radical  axis  of  two  circles  is  a  straight  line  87 

Theorem  41.     The  three  radical  axes  of  three  circles  taken  in 

pairs  are  concurrent 90 

Definition  of  radical  centre 90 

Definition  of  coaxal  circles 91 

Intersecting  coaxal  circles .  92 

Non-intersecting  coaxal  circles 93 

Limiting  points .  94 

Theorem  42.  With  every  system  of  coaxal  circles  there  is 
associated  another  system  of  coaxal  circles,  and  each  circle 
of  either  system  cuts  every  circle  of  the  other  system 
orthogonally 95 

Theorem  43.  Of  two  orthogonal  systems  of  coaxal  circles, 
one  system  is  of  the  intersecting  type  and  the  other  of  the 
non-intersecting  type,  and  the  limiting  points  of  the  latter 
are  the  common  points  of  the  former       ....  97 

Exercises  on  Chapter  X 98 


XIV  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER   XL 

INVERSION. 

PAGE 

Definition  of  inverse  points  ;  centre,  circle,  radius,  constant  of 

inversion      . 100 

Theorem  44.  If  a  figure  is  inverted  first  with  one  radius  of 
inversion  and  then  with  a  different  radius,  the  centre  being 
the  same  in  both  cases,  the  two  inverse  figures  are  similar 
and  similarly  situated,  the  centre  being  their  centre  of 
similitude     .....  .         .  .101 

Theorem  45.     The  inverse  of  a  straight  line,  with  regard  to  a 

point  on  it,  is  the  line  itself 102 

Theorem  46.  The  inverse  of  a  straight  line,  with  regard 
to  a  point  outside  it,  is  a  circle  through  the  centre  of 
inversion      . 102 

Theorem  47.  The  inverse  of  a  circle  with  regard  to  a  point 
on  its  circumference  is  a  straight  line  at  right  angles  to 
the  diameter  through  the  centre  of  inversion  .         .         .         103 

Peaucellier's  Cell 104 

Theorem  48.     The  inverse  of  a  circle  with  regard  to  a  point 

not  on  its  circumference  is  another  circle    .         .         .         .         105 

Theorem  49.    Two  curves  intersect  at  the  same  angles  as  their 

inverses 106 

Examples  of  the  process  of  inverting  a  theorem     .         .         .         107 

Inversion  in  three  dimensions 110 

Exercises  on  Chapter  XI 110 


CHAPTER   XII. 

ORTHOGONAL   PROJECTION. 

Definition  of  orthogonal  projection 114 

Properties  of  orthogonal  projection 114 

Properties  of  the  ellipse 119 


CONTENTS  XV 

CHAPTER   XIII. 

CROSS-RATIO. 

PAOE 

Definition  of  range,  base  of  range    .         .         .         .         .         .         123 

Definition  of  pencil,  vertex  of  pencil 123 

Definition    of    cross-ratio,    or    anharmonic    ratio    of    range ; 

equicross 123 

Definition  of  cross-ratio  of  pencil 125 

Theorem  50.  The  cross-ratio  of  a  pencil  is  equal  to  the  cross- 
ratio  of  the  range  in  which  any  transversal  cuts  that  pencil         126 

Theorem  51.     If  two  lines  cut  a  pencil  in  the  ranges  ABCD, 

A'B'C'D',  then    {ABCD}=  {A'B'C'D'} 127 

Theorem  52.     If  two  pencils  are  subtended  by  the  same  range, 

then  the  cross-ratios  of  the  pencils  are  equal  .         .         .         128 

Cross-ratio  of  pencil  of  parallel  lines 129 

Theorem  53.  If  {ABCD},  {A'B'C'D'}  be  two  equicross  ranges, 
and  if  AA',  BB',  CC  be  concurrent,  then  DD'  must  pass 
through  the  point  of  concurrence      .....         130 

Theorem  54.  If  two  equicross  ranges  {PXYZ},  {PX'Y'Z'} 
have  a  point  P  in  common,  then  XX',  YY',  ZZ'  are  con- 
current          131 

Theorem  55.  If  P  {XYZW},  Q  {XYZW}  be  two  equicross 
pencils,  and  if  X,  Y,  Z  be  collinear,  then  W  is  on  the 
line  XYZ 132 

Theorem  56.     If  two  equicross  pencils  P{ABCD},  Q{ABCD} 

have  a  ray  PQA  in  common,  then  BCD  are  collinear      .         133 

Cross-ratios  are  unaltered  by  projection  .         .         .         .        .         133 
Exercises  on  Chapter  XIII 134 


XVI 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER   XIV. 


PKINCIPLE   OF   DUALITY;    COMPLETE   QUADRILATERAL 
AND   QUADRANGLE. 


Principle  of  duality ,         . 

Definition  of  join  of  points  and  meet  of  lines 

Definitions  connected  with  complete  quadrilateral,  quadrangle 

Theorem  57.  In  a  complete  quadrilateral,  on  each  diagonal 
there  is  a  harmonic  range  formed  by  its  meets  with  the 
other  two  diagonals  together  with  two  vertices  of  the 
quadrilateral        ......... 

Theorem  58.  In  a  complete  quadrangle,  through  each 
diagonal  point,  there  is  a  harmonic  pencil  formed  by  its 
joins  to  the  other  two  diagonal  points  together  with  two 
sides  of  the  quadrangle      ....... 

Ruler  construction  for  fourth  harmonic  ..... 

Self-polar  triangle 

Theorem  59.  If  a  quadrangle  be  inscribed  in  a  circle,  the 
triangle  formed  by  the  diagonal  points  is  self-polar  with 
respect  to  the  circle 

Theorem  60.  If  a  quadrilateral  be  circumscribed  about  a 
circle,  the  triangle  formed  by  the  diagonals  is  self-polar 
with  respect  to  the  circle 

Triangles  in  perspective 

Theorem  61.  (Desargues'  theorem.)  If  two  triangles  are  such 
that  the  lines  joining  their  vertices  in  pairs  are  concurrent, 
then  the  intersections  of  corresponding  sides  are  collinear 

Definition  of  centre,  axis  of  perspective 

Note  on  three-dimensional  geometry 

Exercises  on  Chapter  XIV 

Miscellaneous  Exercises 

Index 


PAGE 

136 
137 
138 


139 


139 
141 
142 


144 

145 
146 


146 
147 
148 
149 
151 
161 


CHAPTER    I. 


THE   SENSE   OF   A   LINE. 

1.  Throughout  this  book  the  word  '  line '  will  generally  be 
used  in  the  sense  of  '  straight  line.' 

2.  In  elementary  Geometry,  the  notation  AB  as  applied  to 
a  straight  line  has  one  of  two  meanings : — 

(1)  The  unlimited  straight  line  defined  by,  and  passing 
through,  the  points  A,   B. 

(2)  The  limited  segment  of  that  line  that  lies  between  A 
and   B. 

It  is  now  necessary  to  explain  a  third  use  of  the  notation. 

We  may  wish  to  discriminate  between  the  step  from  A  to  B, 
and  the  step  from  B  to  A.  In  fact,  we  may  regard  AB  and  BA 
as  different,  AB  meaning  the  step  from  A  to  B,  and  BA  the  step 
from  B  to  A;  AB  and  BA  being  in  different  senses.  If  this  idea 
is  present,  it  is  very  usual  to  draw  attention  to  the  fact  by 
writing  a  bar  over  the  letters:  thus,  AB  means  the  step  from 
A  to   B. 

G.  S.    M.  G.  1 


SENSE   OF  A   LINE 


A  B       C 

fig.  1. 


3.     Reverting  for  a  moment  to  the  more  elementary  idea, 


we  see  that  in  fig.  1 


AB  +  BC  =  AC, 


and  we  may  interpret  this  as  meaning  that  the  consecutive  steps 
from  A  to  B,  and  from  B  to  C,  are  together  equivalent  to  the 
single  step  from  A  to  C. 

It   is    a  natural  extension  of    this  if   we  agree  to  say  that 
in  fig.  2 


AC  B 

fig.  2. 

AB+BC  =  AC    (i), 

meaning  that,  if  we  step  in  succession  from  A  to  B,  and  from 
B  to  C,  the  result  is  the  same  as  if  we  had  stepped  at  once  from 
A  to  C. 

The  above  is  an  extension  of  the  idea  of  addition.  The 
statement  (i)  is,  in  fact,  to  be  regarded  as  true  for  all  cases,  and 
as  following  directly  from  the  extended  idea  of  addition. 


SENSE   OF  A   LINE  3 

4.  As  a  particular  case  of  the  above 

AB  +  BA  =  0, 

.-.    BA=-AB  (ii). 

If,  then,  we  agree  to  regard  as  positive  all  steps  measured 
in  one  sense,  we  may  regard  as  negative  all  steps  measured  in 
the  opposite  sense. 

5.  Let  A,  B,  C,  D,  E  be  any  number  of  points,  arranged  in 
any  order  along  a  line. 

It  follows  from  the  extended  idea  of  addition  that 

AB  +  BC  +  CD  +  DE  =  AE. 

But  AE  =  -  EA, 

.*.    AB+BC+CD+ DE+ EA-0    (iii). 

6.  Suppose  that  O  is  an  origin  and  A,  B  any  two  points 
whatever  in  a  line. 

I 1 1 _. 

BO  A 

fig.  3. 

Then  OA  +  AB  =  OB, 

.-.    AB-OB-OA (iv). 

7.  Let  C  be  the  mid-point  of  AB. 
Then  6a  +  AC  =  OC, 

OB  +  BC  =  00. 

But  B^  =  -  AC, 

.*.   adding,   OA  +  OB  =  20C, 

.      —      OA  +  OB  ,   , 

••     OC-. __ (v). 

1—2 


4  SENSE   OF  A   LINE 

The  above  results,  i  — v,  are  very  important  and  useful : 
their  value  lies  in  this,  that  they  may  be  employed  with  con- 
fidence without  any  reference  to  tlie  figure ;  they  are  true 
whatever  be  the  order  of  the  points  concerned. 

Ex.  1.  Verify  the  truth  of  the  above  results,  i-v,  by  taking  numerical 
instances  and  placing  the  points  in  various  orders. 

Ex.  2.  A,  B,  C,  D  are  points  in  any  order  on  a  straight  fine.  Prove 
that 

AB.CD  +  AC.  DB  +  AD.BC-0. 

Verify  by  taking  numerical  instances. 

Ex.  3.  If  AB  be  divided  in  C  so  that  m.AC=n.CB,  and  if  O  be 
any  point  on  the  infinite  fine  AB, 

j=~^     m.OA  +  n.  OB 
VI +  n 

Ex.  4.  If  O,  A,  B,  C  be  points  on  a  line  ;  and  if  P,  Q,  R  be  the  mid- 
points of  BC,  CA,  AB  respectively,  then 

OP .  BC  +  OQ .  CA  +  OR  .  AB  =  0. 

Ex.  5.     If  A,  B,  C,  D  be  points  on  a  line,  and 
AC.  DB 

CB  .:ad  ~ 

then 

AB.DC     ^     ^ 

^=z — ^=  1  —  A. 

BC.  AD 

Ex.  6.    If  A,  B,  X,  Y  are  four  collinear  points,  and  P  is  a  point  on  the 
same  straight  line  such  that  PA  .  PB  =  PX  .  PY,  show  that 
PA.BX.BY^PB.AX.AY. 

8.  Before  leaving  the  subject  of  the  '  sign  '  or  '  sense '  of 
segment  of  a  line,  one  more  remark  must  be  made. 

If  there  be  two  lines  inclined  to  one  another,  it  is  not 
possible  to  compare,  as  regards  sign,  segments  of  the  one  line 
with  segments  of  the  other  line.  In  fact,  before  any  such  com- 
parison is  possible  we  must  add  ,^/  - 1  to  the  stock  of  symbols  we 
command. 


SENSE   OF   AN   ANGLE 


The  Sense  of  an  Angle. 

9.  There  is  a  certain  analogy  (which  will  be  developed  later) 
between 

(a)  a  point,  lying  on  a  certain  line,  and  moving  along  it,  and 

ip)  a  line,  passing    through  a   certain  point,  and  rotating 
round  it. 

Just  as  in  case  {a)  we  regarded  motion  in  one  sense  as 
positive  and  motion  in  the  opposite  sense  as  negative,  so  in  case 
(b)  we  may  regard  rotation  in  the  one  sense  as  positive  and 
rotation  in  the  opposite  sense  as  negative. 

Thus,  if  an  angle  AOB  is  looked  upon  as  having  been  swept 
out  by  a  radius  rotating  from  OA  to  OB,  we  may  call  it  positive; 
while,  if  it  is  looked  at  as  having  been  swept  out  by  a  radius 
rotating  from  OB  to  OA,  we  should  call  it  negative. 

When  it  is  convenient  to  use  this  idea,  we  should  say  that 
^AOB==-  /.BOA. 


CHAPTiiE    11. 


INFINITY. 

1.  There  is  one  exception  to  the  rule  that  two  coplanar 
straight  lines  define  a  point  by  their  intersection. 

This  is  the  case  of  two  parallel  straight  lines. 

There  is  one  exception  to  the  rule  that  three  points  define 
one  circle  passing  through  them. 

This  is  the  case  of  three  collinear  points. 

There  is  one  exception  to  the  rule  that  a  finite  straight  line 
may  be  divided  both  internally  and  externally  in  a  given  ratio. 

This  is  the  case  of  the  ratio  of  equality. 

These  and  other  exceptions  can  be  removed  by  means  of  the 
mathematical  fiction  called  '  infinity.' 

It  will  be  seen  later  on  that,  by  means  of  the  concept  'in- 
finity '  we  are  able  to  state  as  true  without  exception  an  indefinite 
number  of  results  which  would  otherwise  have  to  be  stated  in  a 
limited  form. 


INFINITY 

2.     Point  at  infinity  on  a  straight  line. 


fig.  4. 


Let  a  straight  line,  always  passing  through  O,  start  from  the 
position  OP  and  revolve  in  a  counter-clockwise  direction,  until  it 
becomes  parallel  to  the  straight  line  PPi. 

In  each  of  its  positions,  the  revolving  line  cuts  the  line 
PPj  in  a  single  point,  until  the  revolving  line  becomes  parallel 
to  PPi. 

When  this  happens,  the  statement  in  black  type  suddenly 
ceases  to  be  true. 

The  more  nearly  the  revolving  line  approaches  to  the  parallel, 
the  more  distant  does  the  point  of  intersection  become. 

It  is  found  to  be  convenient  to  say  that  the  revolving  line, 
when  parallel  to  PPi,  still  cuts  it;  namely,  in  a  point  at  infinity 
on  PPj.  It  will  be  seen  below  that  these  'mathematical  fictions' 
— points  at  infinity — possess  many  properties  in  common  with 
ordinary  points. 

If  the  revolving  line  starts  afresh  from  OP  and  now  revolves 
in  the  clockwise  direction,  it  might  be  supposed  that,  when 
parallel  to  PP^,  it  determines  another  point  at  infinity  on  PPj. 


O  INFINITY 

We  shall  find,  however,  that  it  leads  to  simpler  statements 
if  we  agree  to  say  that  this  point  at  infinity  is  identical  with 
that  obtained  formerly. 

The  reader  may  object  that  this  is  an  unreasonable  conven- 
tion, in  that  it  allows  a  'point  at  infinity '  to  be  infinitely  distant 
from  itself. 

In  answer  to  this  objection,  it  must  be  explained  that  we 
have  not  stated  that  points  at  infinity  enjoy  all  the  properties  of 
ordinary  points. 


3.  As  an  illustration  of  the  uniformity  of  statement  obtained 
by  the  coriventions  already  explained,  the  following  are  now  given 
as  true  without  exception. 

(i)  Any  two  coplanar  straight  lines  define  one  point  by 
their  intersection. 

(ii)  Two  straight  lines  cannot  enclose  a  space.  (If  we  had 
agreed  to  admit  two  points  at  infinity  on  a  straight  line,  two 
parallel  straight  lines  would  define  two  points  and  would  enclose 
an  infinite  space.) 


>         P        B  Q 

fig.  5. 


(iii)     If  it  is  required  to  divide  AB  in  a  given  ratio,  so  that, 

AP 
,  —  >  1,  the  problem  admits  of  two  solut 

ternal  division  (P)  or  by  external  division  (Q). 


AP 
say,  ^^>  1,  the  problem  admits  of  two  solutions:   either  by  in- 
PB 


INFINITY  y 

If  the  ratio  is  gradually  altered  so  that  it  approaches  unity,  P 
will  approach  the  middle  point  O,  and  Q  will  move  off  indefinitely 
to  the  right. 

When  the  ratio  becomes  unity,  the  internal  point  of  division 
is  O,  and  the  external  point  of  division  is  the  point  at  infinity 
on  AB. 

If  the  ratio  had  approached  unity  from  below  instead  of  from 
above,  the  internal  point  of  division  would  have  approached  O 
from  the  left;  and  the  external  point  of  division  would  have 
moved  off  indefinitely  to  the  left  till,  in  the  limit,  it  coincided 
with  the  point  at  infinity,  as  before. 

4.  A  set  of  parallel  lines  cointersect  in  one  point  at  infinity, 
namely  the  point  at  infinity  belonging  to  that  set.  In  fact,  a  set 
of  parallel  lines  is  a  particular  case  of  a  set  (or  pencil)  of  con- 
current lines. 

To  each  set  of  parallels  in  a  plane,  in  other  words  to  each 
direction,  there  belongs  a  point  at  infinity.  If  we  consider  all 
possible  directions,  we  have  a  singly  infinite  set  of  points  at 
infinity;  and  it  may  be  asked  what  is  the  locus  of  these  points. 

The  locus,  apparently,  has  this  property;  that  every  straight 
line  in  the  plane  cuts  it  in  one  point.  For  a  straight  line  cuts 
the  locus  in  the  point  at  infinity  on  that  straight  line. 

In  virtue  of  the  above  property,  the  locus  must,  itself,  be 
regarded  as  a  straight  line.  To  call  it  anything  else,  e.g.  a  circle, 
would  introduce  inconsistency  of  language;  and  the  whole  object 
of  introducing  points  at  infinity  is  to  make  mathematical  lan- 
guage consistent. 

The  locus  of  all  points  at  infinity  in  a  plane  is,  accordingly, 
the  line  at  infinity  in  the  plane. 

This  line  has  many  of  the  properties  of  ordinary  lines,  while 
it  has  other  properties  that  are  unfamiliar;  e.g.  it  can  be  shown 
to  make  any  angle  whatsoever  with  itself. 


10  INFINITY 

5.     Limit  of  a  circle  of  infinite  radius. 


Suppose  that  the  circle  in  tig.  6  continually  touches  the  line 
DAE  in  A,  while  the  radius  continually  increases  without  limit, 
and  the  centre  O  recedes  to  infinity  along  AF  produced. 

The  circle  will  flatten  out,  and  the  semicircle  BAG  will  clearly 
tend  to  coincide  with  the  infinite  line  DAE. 

But  it  cannot  be  supposed  that  the  limit  of  the  circle  is  simply 
DAE ;  for  a  circle  is  cut  by  any  line  in  2  points,  while  DAE  is  cut 
by  any  line  in  1  point :  an  essential  distinction. 

In  fact,  all  the  points  on  the  semicircle  BFC  recede  to  infinity, 
and  tend  to  lie  on  the  line  at  infinity. 

Therefore  a  circle  of  infinite  radius  with  centre  at  infinity 
consists  of  an  infinite  straight  line  together  with  the 
straight  line  at  infinity. 


Ex.  7.  In  the  limit  of  figure  6  examine  what  becomes  of  the  points  C, 
B  and  of  the  tangents  EC,  DB. 

Ex.  8.  Find  what  becomes  of  the  theorem  that  '  a  chord  of  a  circle 
subtends  equal  or  supplementary  angles  at  all  points  of  the  circumference ' 
for  the  case  when  the  circle  becomes  a  finite  line  plus  the  line  at  infinity. 


CHAPTER    III. 


THE    CENTROID. 

The  properties  of  the  centroid  are  mainly  of  interest  in  con- 
nection with  statics,  where  they  apply  to  the  centre  of  gravity 
of  a  system  of  weights.  The  idea,  however,  is  essentially  geo- 
metrical; and  will,  therefore,  be  developed  briefly  in  this  place. 

Definition.  The  centroid  of  n  points  in  a  plane,  Pj,  P2,  P3, 
P4,  ...  P„  is  arrived  at  by  the  following  construction.  Bisect  PjPg 
in  A.  Divide  AP3  in  B  so  that  2AB-  BP3.  Divide  BP4  in  C  so 
that  3BC  =  CP4;  and  so  forth.  The  final  point  obtained  by  this 
process  is  G,  the  centroid  of  P^  ...  P^^.* 

*  The  reader  will  notice  that  this  definition  is  faulty,  inasmuch  that 
a  doubt  remains  whether  we  should  reach  the  same  point  G  if  we  took  the 
points  P  in  a  different  order.  It  is  proved  below  that  the  point  G  is 
unique. 


12 


THE   CENTROID 


Theorem  1. 
If  the  distances  of  two  points  p,  Q  from  a  line  XY  be 
2/1 J  y-2  (sign  being  taken  into  account);  and  if  G  be  taken 
on  PQ  so  that  A.pg=A;.gq,  then  the  distance  of  G  from 
the  line  is 

h  +  k 


P  U 

fig.  7. 

Through  P  draw  PUV  ||  to  XY,  meeting  GL,  QN  (produced  if 

necessary)  in  U,  V. 

Then,  in  every  case'''  (sign  being  taken  into  account) 

UG  :  VQ=PG  :  PG  +  GQ 

=  k  :  k-i-h, 

k 

:.      UG=^ r.VQ. 

h-vk 

But  VQ=NQ-NV=NQ-MP 

and    LG  =  UG  +  MP 

=  ATI  (2/^-2/1) +2/: 

h  +  k 

h  +  k 

*  This  proof  is  a  good  instance  of  the  fact  explained  in  Chap.  I.,  that 
the  attribution  of  sign  to  lines  makes  us,  in  a  measure,  independent  of  the 
variety  of  figures  that  may  be  drawn. 


THE   CENTROID  13 


Theorem  2. 

If  the  distances  of  points  Pj,  ,..,  p„  from  a  line  be 
2/1  >  ••5  Un  (sign  being  taken  into  account),  the  distance 
of  the  centroid  G  from  the  line  is 


The  mid-point  of  Pj  P2  is  A,  and  its  distance  is  . 

B  is  taken  so  that  2AB  =  BP3, 

.'.  the  distance  of  B  is — = 

2  +  1 

2/1  +  2/2  +  2/3 


3 

C  is  taken  so  tliat  3BC=:CP4, 


*.  the  distance  of  C  is 


3  +  1 

2/1  +  2/2  +  2/3  +  ^4 


4 
etc.,  etc. 
Finally  the  distance  of  G  from  the  line  is 

2/1  +  2/2  +  2/3  •••  +2/n 
n 


14  the  centroid 

Theorem  3. 

If  the  coordinates  of  Pj,  Pg,  ...,  P,i,  with  respect  to  two 
axes  at  right  angles,  be  {x,,  y,)  {x.^,  y^)  (x.„  3/3)  ...  (x^,  y,,)  the 
coordinates  of  the  centroid  are 


n  n 

This  follows  immediately  from  Theorem  2. 

Theorem  3  makes  it  clear,  from  the  symmetry  of  the  expres- 
sions for  the  coordinates  of  G,  that  the  same  centroid  would  have 
been  reached  if  the  points  P  had  been  taken  in  any  other  order. 

The  centroid  is  therefore  (i)  unique,  (ii)  fixed  relative  to  the 
points  P. 

From  the  fact  that  the  same  centroid  is  obtained  in  whatever 
order  the  points  are  taken,  a  class  of  geometrical  theorems  may  be 
deduced  of  which  the  following  is  an  example. 

Example.  The  medians  of  a  triangle  meet  in  a  point, 
and  each  median  is  trisected  at  this  point. 


Consider  the  centroid  of  the  three  points  A,  B,  C.  Let  BC  be 
bisected  at  a,  and  let  G  be  taken  on  Aa  so  that  AG  =  2Ga.  Then 
G  is  the  centroid :  it  lies  on  the  median  Aa  and  trisects  it. 

Similarly  the  same  point  G  lies  on  each  of  the  other  medians, 
and  trisects  it. 

Hence  the  medians  meet  in  a  point,  which  trisects  each 
median. 


THE   CENTROID  15 

Ex.  O.  ABCD  being  a  quadrilateral,  the  joins  of  the  mid-points  of 
AB,  CD  ;  of  AC,  BD;  of  AD,  BC  meet  in  a  point;  and  each  join  is  bisected 
at  this  point. 

Ex.  lO.  A,  B,  C,  D  are  four  points  in  a  plane.  Let  the  centroids  of  the 
triangles  BCD,  CDA,  DAB,  ABC  be  a,  /3,  7,  5  respectively.  Then  Aa,  BjS, 
C7,  D5  meet  in  a  point ;  and  are  divided  in  the  same  ratio  at  this  point. 

Ex,  11.  Assuming  the  existence  of  a  centroid  in  three  dimensions, 
generalise  Exs.  9  and  10  for  the  case  in  which  ABCD  is  a  tetrahedron. 

Ex.12.  If  G  be  the  centroid  of  Pi,  P2,  ...  P„,  andGMi,  GM2,  GM3,... 
GM„,  be  the  projections  of  GPi,  GP2,  GP3,  ...  GP„  on  a  line  through  G  ; 
then  SGIVI=0. 

Ex.   13.      O   being    any  point,    and  G    the  centroid   of  n  points    Pj, 

P2>  •••  Pn> 

20P2  =  2GP2+w.OG2. 

(Use  the  extension  of  Pythagoras'  theorem.) 


CHAPTER    IV. 


THE   TRIANGLE. 

Notatiofi.     Special  points  and  quantities  will   be  denoted  by 
the  following  letters,  in  the  course  of  the  present  chapter 

A,  B,  C vertices  of  the  triangle, 

D,  E,  F feet  of  the  altitudes, 

a,  yS,  y mid-points  of  the  sides, 

X,  Y,  Z points  of  contact  of  the  in-circle, 

a,  h,  c  lengths  of  the  sides, 

s  semi-perimeter  (2s  —  a  -\-  h  +  c)^ 

R circum-radius, 

r  in-radius, 

^i>  ^"2  5  ^'3  ...ex- radii, 

A area  of  the  triangle, 

S circumcentre, 

H orthocentre, 

G centroid, 

I    in-centre, 

h,  I2,  I3     ...ex- centres, 

N nine-points  centre, 

P,  Q,  R mid-points  of  HA,  HB,  HC. 


THE  TRIANGLE  17 


Theorem  4. 


A  =  ^bc  sin  A. 


fig.  9. 

Case  i.     If  lA  is  acute. 

Draw  CF  x  to  AB. 

A  =  jAB.CF. 
But  CF  =  CAsinA, 
.'.  A^iAB.CAsinA 
—  \hc  sin  A. 
Similarly  A  =  \ca  sin  B  =  \ab  sin  C. 

Case  ii.     If  lA  is  obtuse. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 

Ex.  14.    Prove  the  above  theorem  for  the  case  in  which  z  A  is  obtuse. 

Ex.  15.  Prove  the  theorem  that  the  ratio  of  the  areas  of  similar  triangles 
is  equal  to  the  ratio  of  the  squares  on  corresponding  sides. 

Ex.  16.  Two  sides  OP,  OR  of  a  variable  parallelogram  OPQR  always 
lie  along  two  fixed  lines  OX,  OY ;  and  Q  describes  the  locus  defined  by 
OP  .  PQ  =  constant.     Prove  that  the  area  of  the  parallelogram  is  constant. 

Ex.  17.    Deduce  from  Theorem  4  that 

O'     __      b     _      c 
sin  A  ~"  sin  B  ~  sin  C  * 

G.  S.    M.  G.  2 


18  THE  TRIANGLE 


=  2R. 


Case  i.     If  the  triangle  is  acute  angled. 

Join  CS. 

Produce  CS  to  meet  circumcircle  in  Y. 

Join  BY. 

Since  CY  is  a  diameter  of  the  0 , 

.*.  z_  CBY  is  a  rt  z. . 

Also   L  BYC  =  z.  BAG, 

BC  _   a 
CY  ~  2R 

^  2R. 


sin  A 


b  c 

Similarly  -r—-  =  -^—r  -  2R. 
''    sin  B      sin  C 

Case  ii.     If  the  triangle  is  obtuse  angled. 
The  proof  of  this  case  is  left  to  the  reader. 

Ex.  18.     Prove  Case  ii  of  Theorem  5. 


THE  TRIANGLE 


19 


Ex.  10.    Prove  that 


ahc 
4A* 


Ex.  20.  Prove  that  the  circum-radius  of  an  equilateral  triangle  of  side  x 
is  approximately  -577^:. 

Ex.  21.  SAP,  PBQ,  QCR,  RDS  are  lines  bisecting  the  exterior  angles 
of  a  convex  quadrilateral  ABCD.     Prove  that 

PB  .  QC  .  RD  .  SA  =  PA  .  SD  .  RC  .  QB. 

Ex.  22.  Deduce  from  Theorem  5  the  fact  that  the  bisector  of  the  vertical 
angle  of  a  triangle  divides  the  base  in  the  ratio  of  the  sides  containing  the 
vertical  angle. 


Theorem  6. 

e^2^52^^2_2^>ccosA. 
Case  I.     If  l  IK  is  acute. 


a2^52^^2_2c.AF. 
But  AF  =  6cosA, 
a^  =  6"  +  c^  —  26c  cos  A. 


II.  9. 


2—2 


20  THE  TRIANGLE 

Case  ii.     If  lPk  is  obtuse. 


a^^b'-  +  c^  +  2c.  AF. 

But  AF  =  6cosCAF 

and  cos  A  =  -  cos  CAF, 

.*.  AF  =  —  i  cos  A, 
.*.  a^^b'^  +  G'^-2bccosA. 
Similarly  b"^  =  c^  +  a^  -  2ca  cos  B, 
c^  =  a^  +  b^-2abcosC. 

Ex.  23.    Examine  the  case  z  A  =  90°. 

Theorem  7. 
Apollonius'"*  Theorem. 
If  a  is  mid-point  of  BC,  then 

AB2  +  AC2=:2Aa2-^2Ba2. 
A 


II. 


Draw  AD  ±  to  BC. 
Suppose  that,  of  the  l  s  AaB,  AaC,   z.  AaB  is  acute. 

*  Apollonius  (260—200  b.c.)  studied  and  probably  lectured  at  Alexandria. 
Nicknamed  e. 


THE   TRIANGLE  21 

Then,  from  AABa 

AB^  =  Aa^  +  Ba^  --  2 Ba  .  Da, 
and  from  AACa 

AC2  :=.  tKa?  +  Ca^  +  2Ca  .  Da. 
But  Ca  =  Ba, 

/.   AB'^  +  AC2  =  2Aa2  +  2Ba2. 

Ex.  24.  Examine  what  this  theorem  becomes  in  the  following  cases, 
giving  a  proof  in  each  case : 

(i)     if  A  coincides  with  a  point  in  BC. 

(ii)    if  A  coincides  with  C. 

(iii)    if  A  coincides  with  a  point  in  BC  produced. 

Ex!  25.  The  base  BC  of  an  isosceles  a  ABC  is  produced  to  D,  so  that 
CD^BC;  provethat  AD2  =  AC2  +  2BC2. 

Ex.  26.  A  side  PR  of  an  isosceles  a  PQR  is  produced  to  S  so  that 
RS  =  PR:  prove  that  QS2  =  2QR2+PR2. 

Ex.  27.  The  base  AD  of  a  triangle  OAD  is  trisected  in  B,  C.  Prove 
that  OA2  +  20D2  =  30C2  +  6CD2. 

Ex.  28.    In  the  figure  of  Ex.  27,  OA2  +  OD2=OB2  +  OC2-f  4BC2. 

Ex.  29.     If  Q  is  a  point  on  BC  such  that  BQ  =  7i .  QC,  then 
AB2  +  w  .  AC2  =  BQ2  +  n  .  CQ2  +  (^^  + 1)  aQ2. 

(This  is  a  generalized  theorem,  of  which  Apollonius'  theorem  is  a  par- 
ticular case.    Also  compare  Ex.  27.) 

Ex.  30.  A  point  moves  so  that  the  sum  of  the  squares  of  its  distances 
from  two  fixed  points  A,  B  remains  constant ;  prove  that  its  locus  is  a  circle. 

Ex.  31.  The  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  sides  of  a  parallelogram  is  equal 
to  the  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  diagonals. 

Ex.  32.  In  any  quadrilateral  the  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  four  sides 
exceeds  the  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  diagonals  by  four  times  the  square  on 
the  straight  line  joining  the  mid-points  of  the  diagonals. 


22  THE  TRIANGLE 

Ex.  33.  The  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  diagonals  of  a  quadrilateral  is 
equal  to  twice  the  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  lines  joining  the  mid-points  of 
opposite  sides. 

Ex,  34.  In  a  triangle,  three  times  the  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  sides 
=  four  times  the  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  medians. 

Definition.     A  set  of  lines  which  all  pass  through  the  same 
point  are  called  concurrent. 

Definition.     A  set  of  points  which  all  lie  on  the  same  line 
are  called  coUinear. 

Definition.     The  circumscribing  circle  of  a  triangle  is  often 
called  the  circum-circle ;  and  its  centre  the  circum-centre. 


Theorem  8. 

The  perpendicular  bisectors  of  the  sides  of  a  triangle 
are  concurrent;  and  the  point  of  concurrence,  s,  is  the 
circumcentre. 

Every  point  on  the  ±  bisector  of  CA  is  equidistant  from 
C  and  A,  and  every  point  on  the  i.  bisector  of  AB  is  equidistant 
from  A  and  B. 

.*.  the  point  where  these  lines  meet  is  equidistant  from  A,  B, 
and  C;  and,  being  equidistant  from  B  and  C,  it  is  on  the  ±  bisector 
of  BC. 

.*.  the  ±  bisectors  of  the  three  sides  meet  at  S,  the  circum- 
centre. 

Ex.  35.  Through  A,  B,  C  draw  lines  parallel  to  BC,  CA,  AB  respectively, 
forming  a  triangle  A'B'C.  By  considering  the  circumcentre  of  aA'B'C, 
prove  that  the  altitudes  of  a  ABC  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  36.  Through  each  vertex  of  a  triangle  a  pair  of  lines  is  drawn 
parallel  to  the  lines  joining  the  circumcentre  to  the  other  two  vertices. 
Show  that  these  six  lines  form  an  equilateral  hexagon,  whose  opposite 
angles  are  equal. 


THE   TRIANGLE  23 

Definition.     The  inscribed  circle  of  a  triangle  is  often  called 
the  in-circle ;  and  its  centre  the  in-centre. 


Theorem  9. 

The  internal  bisectors  of  the  angles  of  a  triangle  are 
concurrent;  and  the  point  of  concurrence,  i,  is  the  in- 
centre. 

Every  point  on  the  internal  bisector  of  Z-  B  is  equidistant  from 
AB  and  BC,  and  every  point  on  the  internal  bisector  of  z.  C  is 
equidistant  from  BC  and  CA. 

.*.  the  point  where  these  lines  meet  is  equidistant  from  BC, 
CA  and  AB;  and,  being  equidistant  from  CA  and  AB  and  inside 
the  triangle,  it  is  on  the  internal  bisector  of  L  A. 

.*.  the  internal  bisectors  of  the  three  angles  meet  at  I,  the 
in-centre. 

Ex.  37.    Prove  that  r=— . 

s 

[Use  A  ABC  ^  A  I  BC  +  A  ICA  +  A  lAB.] 

Ex.  38.  If  a  polygon  is,  such  that  a  circle  can  be  inscribed  in  it,  the 
bisectors  of  the  angles  are  concurrent. 

State  a  corresponding  theorem  for  a  polygon  about  which  a  circle  can  be 
described. 

Ex.  39.    Describe  a  circle  to  touch  a  given  circle  and  two  of  its  tangents. 

Ex.  40.  Prove  that  any  circle  whose  centre  is  I  cuts  off  equal  chords 
from  the  three  sides. 

Ex.  41.  If  Al  meets  the  in-cirele  in  P,  prove  that  P  is  the  in-centre 
of  aAYZ.     (For  notation  see  p.  16.) 

Ex.  42.  The  internal  and  external  bisectors  of  z  A  meet  the  circumcircle 
in  K,  K'.     Prove  that  KK'  is  the  perpendicular  bisector  of  BC. 

Ex.  43.    If  Al  meets  the  circumcircle  in  U,  SU  is  perpendicular  to  BC. 


24 


THE  TRIANGLE 


Definition.  A  circle  which  touches  one  side  of  a  triangle,  and 
the  other  two  sides  produced,  is  called  an  escribed  circle  or  an 
ex-circle.     Its  centre  is  called  an  ex-centre. 

A  triangle  clearly  has  3  ex- circles. 


Theorem  10. 

The  internal  bisector  of  l  a,  and  the  external  bisectors 
of  ^s  B  and  c  are  concurrent;  and  the  point  of  con- 
currence is  the  ex-centre  i,. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 


Ex.  44.     A,  I,  h  are  collinear. 


Ex.  45. 


are  collinear. 


Ex.  46.     All  is  L  to  I2I3. 

Ex.  47.    If  another  interior  common  tangent  be  drawn  to  the  circles  I,  h, 
and  cut  BC  in  K,  then  IKh  is  a  straight  line. 


THE  TRIANGLE 


25 


Theorem  11. 

A 

r  =  — . 
s 


B                        X 

C 

fig.  15. 

AIBC+  AICA+  AIAB  = 

=  A  ABC 

Now    AIBC-i|X. 

BC 

=  lm, 

A  ICA  =  Jr6, 

A  lAB  -  Ire  ; 

.*.  ^ra  +  ^rb  +  ^rc  = 

-^> 

a  +  b  +  c 

} 

.'.  rs  =  A  ; 

A 

28 


fig.  17. 

(i)      AYi  +  AZi  =  AC  +  CYi+AB+BZi 

==  AC  +  CXj  +  AB  +  BXj  (since  tangents  to  a  circle 
=  AC  +  AB  +  BC  from  a  point  are  equal) 

=  2s. 

But  AYi  =  AZi, 


(ii) 


(iii) 


AY  +  AZ  =  AC  -  CY  +  AB  -  BZ 
=  AC  -  CX  +  AB  -  BX 
=  AC  +  AB  -  BC 
=  2s-  2a. 

But  AY  =  AZ, 

.•.  AY  =  AZ  =s-a. 

YYi  =  AYi  -  AY 
=  s  —  {s  —  a) 
=  a. 
Similarly  ZZj  =  a. 


THE  TRIANGLE  29 

(iv)  BXi  =  BZi-AZi-AB 

=  S  —  G. 

Also  ex  -  s  —  c,  by  proof  similar  to  (ii). 

(v)  XXi  =  BC  -  CX  -  BXi 

—  a—2(s  —  c) 
=  a-(a  +  b  +  c)  +  2g 
=  c-b. 
If  the  figure  were  drawn  with  6  >  c,  it  would  be  found  that 
XXi  =  6  -  c. 

Ex.  69.  Find  the  lengths  of  the  segments  into  which  the  point  of 
contact  of  the  in-circle  divides  the  hypotenuse  of  a  right-angled  triangle 
whose  sides  are  6  and  8  feet. 

Ex.  60.     The  distance  between  X  and  the  mid-point  of  BC  is  ^  (&  ~  c). 

Ex.  61.  The  in-radius  of  a  right-angled  triangle  is  equal  to  half  the 
difference  between  the  sum  of  the  sides  and  the  hypotenuse. 

Ex.  62.  If  the  diagonals  of  a  quadrilateral  ABCD  intersect  at  right 
angles  at  O,  the  sum  of  the  in-radii  of  the  triangles  AOB,  BOC,  COD,  DOA 
is  equal  to  the  difference  between  the  sum  of  the  diagonals  and  the  semi- 
perimeter  of  the  quadrilateral.     (Use  Ex.  61.) 

Ex.  63.  Two  sides  of  a  triangle  of  constant  perimeter  lie  along  two 
fixed  lines ;  prove  that  the  third  side  touches  a  fixed  circle. 

Definition.     The  line  joining  a  vertex  of  a  triangle  to  the 
mid-point  of  the  opposite  side  is  called  a  median. 

.  Definition.  The  triangle  whose  vertices  are  the  mid-points  of 
the  sides  is  called  the  medial  triangle  of  the  given  triangle. 

Ex.  64.    Prove  that  two  medians  trisect  one  another. 

Ex.  65.    Hence  prove  that  the  three  medians  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  66.     The  circumradius  of  the  medial  triangle  is  ^R. 

Lemma  1. 
If  y,  /3  are  the  mid-points  of  ab  and  AC,  then  yfi  is 
parallel  to  BC  and  equal  to  JBC. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 


so  THE   TRIANGLE 

Theorem  14. 

The  medians  of  a  triangle  are  concurrent ;  and  each 
median  is  trisected  at  the  point  of  concurrence,  G. 

A 


fig.  18. 

Let  the  two  medians  By8,  Cy  meet  at  G. 
Join  Py. 

Then,  bj^  Lemma  1,  y^  is  ||  to  BC  and  =^BC. 
Again,  As  G^y,  GBC  are  similar  (?), 

.'.   G/3  :  GB  =  Gy  :  GC 

=  /?y  :  BC  =  1  :  2. 
.*.    two  medians   BjS,  Cy  intersect  at  a  point   of    trisection 
of  each. 

Let  the  median  Aa  cut  By8  in  G'. 

Then  it  may  be  proved,  as  above,  that  /3g'  =  JySB,  aG'  =  JaA. 
But  ^G  =  lySB, 
.*.    G'  coincides  with  G, 
and  aG  =  JaA. 
.*.    the  three  medians   are  concurrent  and  each  median  is 
trisected  at  the  point  of  concurrence,  G. 

J}^ote.  It  will  be  noticed  that  G,  the  point  of  concurrence  of 
the  three  medians,  is  the  centroid  of  the  three  points  A,  B,  C 
(see  Chap,  in.):  accordingly  G  is  called  the  centroid  of  the 
triangle. 

Ex.  67.  Prove  the  centroid  property  of  a  triangle  by  the  following 
method :  let  Bj3,  Cy  meet  in  G  ;  produce  AG  to  P  so  that  G  P  =  AG  :  then 
prove  that  GBPC  is  a  ||«g'"'''»  etc. 

Ex.  68.     The  triangles  GBC,  GCA,  GAB  are  equivalent. 

Ex.  69.  OnAB,  AC  points  Q,  R  are  taken  so  that  AQ=riAB,AR  =  i  AC. 
CQ,  BR  meet  in  P,  and  AP  produced  meets  BC  in  D ;  find  the  ratio 
AP  :  AD. 

Ex.  70.     The  triangles  ABC,  a^Sy  have  the  same  centroid. 


the  triangle  31 

Theorem  15. 
The  three  altitudes  of  a  triangle  are  concurrent. 
A 


:^ 


B     D  C 

fig.  19. 

Draw   BE,  CF  ±  to  AC,  AB  ;  let  them  meet  in   H.      Join  AH 
and  produce  it  to  meet  BC  in  D. 

We  have  to  prove  that  AD  is  ±  to  BC. 
Join  FE. 

Since    z.  s  AFH,  AEH  are  rt.   l  s, 
A,  F,  H,  E  are  coney clic ; 
.-.    L.  FAH  =  L.  FEH. 
Again,  since  l  s  BFC,  BEC  are  rt.   l  s, 

.*.  B,  F,  E,  C  are  concyclic ; 
.•.  L  FEH  =  L  FCB. 
But    L  FAH  =  L  FEH, 
.-.  L  FAH  =  L  FCB, 
.*.  F,  A,  C,  D  are  concyclic, 
.'.  L  ADC  =  L  AFC  =  a  rt.    L. 
Hence  AD  is  ±  to  BC, 
and  the  three  altitudes  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  71.     Does  the  above  proof  need  any  modification  '\i  L^  is  right  or 
obtuse  ? 

Definition.     The  point  of  concurrence,  H,  of  the  altitudes  of  a 
triangle  is  called  the  orthocentre. 

Ex.  72.     If  H  is  the  orthocentre  of  a  ABC,  then  A  is  the  orthocentre  of 
A  BCH,  B  of  A  CAH,  and  C  of  a  ABH. 


32 


THE   TRIANGLE 


Ex.  73.     I  is  the  orthocentre  of  a  Iil2l3' 

(Notice  that  A,  I,  li  are  collinear;  as  also  1^,  A,  I3.) 

Ex.74.     AH.HD  =  BH.HE  =  CH.HF. 

Ex.  75.     AS  and  AH  are  equally  inclined  to  the  bisector  of  z  A. 

Ex.  76.     Z  BHC  is  the  supplement  of  Z  A. 

Ex.  77.  Show  that  if  two  of  the  opposite  angles  of  a  convex  quadri- 
lateral be  right  angles,  the  external  diagonal  of  the  complete  quadrilateral 
formed  by  the  sides  is  perpendicular  to  an  internal  diagonal. 

Definition.     The  triangle  whose  vertices  are  the  feet  of  the 
altitudes  is  called  the  pedal  triangle  of  the  given  triangle. 

Ex.  78.  The  triangles  ABC,  HBC,  HCA,  HAB  all  have  the  same  pedal 
triangle. 

Ex.  79.  The  orthocentre  of  a  triangle  is  the  in-centre  of  its  pedal 
triangle. 

Ex.  80.  The  triangle  formed  by  the  tangents  at  A,  B,  C  to  the  circum- 
circle  is  similar  and  similarly  situated  to  the  pedal  triangle. 


Theorem  16. 
If  AH  produced  meets  the  circumcircle  in   x,   then 


HD  =  DX. 


X 

fig.  20. 
Since  z_  s  E  and  D  are  rt.  l  s, 

.*.  A,  E,  D,  B  are  concyclic, 

.-.     Z.DBE=^DAE. 

Also  L  DBX  =  L  DAE,  in  the  same  segment. 

.*.    L  DBE  =  ^  DBX. 

Hence  As  DBH,  DBX  are  congruent, 

and    HD  =  DX. 


THE   TRIANGLE 


33 


Ex.  81.  Draw  a  figure  for  Theorem  16,  in  which  z  A  is  obtuse.  Does 
the  proof  need  any  modification  for  this  case  ? 

Ex.  82.  The  triangles  ABC,  AHB,  BHC,  CHA  have  equal  circum- 
circles. 

Ex.  83.  H  is  the  circumcentre  of  the  triangle  formed  by  the  circum- 
centres  of  AHB,  BHC,  CHA. 

Ex.84.     BD.DC^AD.HD. 

Ex.  85.  The  base  and  vertical  angle  of  a  triangle  are  given.  Prove  that 
the  locus  of  the  orthocentre  is  a  circle  equal  to  the  circurncircle,  Find  also 
the  loci  of  the  in-centre  and  the  centroid, 


Theorem  17. 

AH  =  2Sa. 


fig.  21, 

Let  CS  meet  circurncircle  in  Q. 

Since  S  and  a  are  the  mid-points  of  CQ  and  CB  respectively, 
QB  =  2Sa, 
and  QB  is  ||  to  Sa  and  to  AH. 
Again,  as  CO  is  a  diameter,   l  CAQ  is  a  rt.  ^  , 
.'.    AQis  II  to  HB. 
Hence  AQBH  is  a  ||««'-'^'". 
/.    AH  =  QB  =  2Sa. 

G.  S.    M.  G.  3 


32 


THE  TRIANGLE 


Ex.  73.     I  is  the  orthocentre  of  A  lilt's- 

(Notice  that  A,  I,  Ij  are  collinear ;  as  also  I2,  A,  I3.) 

Ex.74.     AH.HD  =  BH.HE  =  CH.HF. 

Ex.  76.     AS  and  AH  are  equally  inclined  to  the  bisector  of  L  A. 

Ex.  76.     z  BHC  is  the  supplement  of  Z  A. 

Ex.  77.  Show  that  if  two  of  the  opposite  angles  of  a  convex  quadri- 
lateral be  right  angles,  the  external  diagonal  of  the  complete  quadrilateral 
formed  by  the  sides  is  perpendicular  to  an  internal  diagonal. 

Definition.  The  triangle  whose  vertices  are  the  feet  of  the 
altitudes  is  called  the  pedal  triangle  of  the  given  triangle. 

Ex.  78.  The  triangles  ABC,  HBC,  HCA,  HAB  all  have  the  same  pedal 
triangle. 

Ex.  79.  The  orthocentre  of  a  triangle  is  the  in-centre  of  its  pedal 
triangle. 

Ex.  80.  The  triangle  formed  by  the  tangents  at  A,  B,  C  to  the  circum- 
circle  is  similar  and  similarly  situated  to  the  pedal  triangle. 


Theorem  16. 
If  AH  produced  meets  the  circumcircle  in   X,   then 


HD  =  DX. 


X 

fig.  20. 

Since  jl  s  E  and  D  are  rt.  z_  s, 

.*.  A,  E,  D,  B  are  concyclic, 

.'.     Z.DBE=^DAE. 

Also  z.  DBX  =  ^  DAE,  in  the  same  segment. 

.'.    L  DBE  =  z.  DBX. 

Hence  As  DBH,  DBX  are  congruent, 

and    HD  =  DX. 


THE   TRIANGLE 


33 


Ex.  81.  Draw  a  figure  for  Theorem  16,  in  which  z  A  is  obtuse.  Does 
the  proof  need  any  modification  for  this  case  ? 

Ex.  82.  The  triangles  ABC,  AHB,  BHC,  CHA  have  equal  circum- 
circles. 

Ex.  83.  H  is  the  circumcentre  of  the  triangle  formed  by  the  circum- 
centres  of  AHB,  BHC,  CHA. 

Ex.84.     BD.DC  =  AD.HD. 

Ex.  85.  The  base  and  vertical  angle  of  a  triangle  are  given.  Prove  that 
the  locus  of  the  orthocentre  is  a  circle  equal  to  the  circumcircle,  Find  also 
the  loci  of  the  in-centre  and  the  centroid. 


Theorem  17. 

AH  =  2Sa. 


fig.  21. 

Let  CS  meet  circumcircle  in  Q. 

Since  S  and  a  are  the  mid-points  of  CQ  and  CB  respectively, 
QB  =  2Sa, 
and  QB  is  ||  to  Sa  and  to  AH. 
Again,  as  C(3l  is  a  diameter,   l  CAQ  is  a  rt.  z. , 
.-.    AQ  is  II  to  HB. 
Hence  AQBH  is  a  yogram 
.*.    AH  =  QB  =  2Sa. 

G.  S.    M.  G.  3 


84 


THE   TRIANGLE 


Ex.  86.  Prove  Theorem  17  by  using  the  fact  that  H  is  the  circumcentre 
of  the  triangle  formed  by  drawing  parallels  to  the  sides  through  the  opposite 
vertices. 

Ex.  87.  Let  P  be  the  mid-point  of  AH.  Show  that  aP,  SH  bisect  one 
another. 

Ex.  88.  Show  that  N,  the  mid-point  of  HS,  is  the  centre  of  the 
circle  PDa. 

Ex.  89.     Show  that  aP  is  equal  to  the  circumradius  of  ABC. 

Ex.  90.  Show  that  a  circle  with  centre  N  (the  mid-point  of  HS)  and 
radius  equal  to  |R  will  pass  through  D,  E,  F,  a,  j8,  7  and  the  mid-points  of 
HA,  HB,  HC. 

Ex.  91.     The  perpendicular  bisectors  of  Da,  E/3,  F7  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  92.     Prove  that  AS,  Ha  meet  on  the  circumcircle, 

Ex.  93.  If  P,  Q,  R  are  the  mid-points  of  HA,  HB,  HC,  then  a  PQR  is 
congruent  with  a  a/37. 

Ex.  94.     SP  is  bisected  by  the  median  Aa. 

Ex.  95.     The  circumradius  of  a  a/37  is  JR. 

Ex.  96.     Prove  that  A  s  a^y,  D7/3  are  congruent. 

Ex.  97.  Show  that  a^yD  are  concyclic.  Use  Ex.  96  to  show  that  the 
circumcircle  of  the  pedal  triangle  passes  through  the  mid-points  of  the  sides. 

Ex.  98.     Apply  the  result  of  Ex.  97  to  the  triangle  HBC. 

Ex.  99.  Combining  the  two  preceding  exercises,  deduce  the  result  of 
Ex.  90. 


Theoeem  18. 
The  points  H,  G,  s  are  collinear ;  and  HG  ^  2GS. 

A 


THE  TRIANGLE 


35 


Let  Aa  cut  HS  in  G'. 

Since  AH  and  Sa  are  ||,  As  AHG',  aSG'  are  similar, 
and  since  AH  =  2Sa, 
.'.    AG'  =  2G'a. 
.'.    G'  is  identical  with  G,  the  centroid. 
Also  HG  ==2GS. 

Ex.  lOO.    Use  fig.  22  to  prove,  independently,  the  concurrence  of  the 
three  medians. 

Ex.  lOl.    If  AS,  Ha  meet  at  K,  the  centroid  of  A  AKH  is  G. 


Theorem  19. 

A  circle  whose  centre  is  the  mid-point  of  SH,  and 
whose  radius  is  Jr,  passes  through 

D,  E,  F  the  feet  of  the  altitudes, 

a,  p,  y  the  mid-points  of  the  sides, 

p,  Q,  R  the  mid-points  of  ha,  hb,  hc. 


Join  aP,  SH.     Let  them  intersect  at  N. 
(i)       H  P  =  iH A  =  aS,  and  H P  is  II  to  aS, 
.-.  HPSaisa  \\^«^^^\ 
and  the  diagonals  HS,  Pa  bisect  one  another. 
.".  N  is  the  mid-point  of  HS  and  bisects  Pa. 


3—2 


36 


D        d 

fig.  23. 

(ii)      Since  ^  PDa  is  a  rt.  zi ,  Pa  is  the  diameter  and  N  the 

centre  of  0  PDa. 
(iii)      AP  is  equal  and  ||  to  Sa, 

.'.  APaS  is  a  \\^sr^^^ 

:.  aPr=SA, 

and  NP,  the  radius  of  0  PDa  =  JaP  =  \Sk  =  iR. 

(iv)     It  has  been  shown  that  the  circle  whose  centre  is  N, 

the  mid-point  of  SH,  and  whose  radius  is  ^R,  passes  through  the 

foot  of  one  altitude,  the  mid-point  of  one  side,  and  the  mid-point 

of  HA. 

By  similar  reasoning  this  circle  luay  be  shown  to  pass  through 
the  feet  of  the  three  altitudes,  the  mid-points  of  the  three  sides, 
and  the  mid-points  of  HA,  HB,  HC. 

This  circle  is  called  the  nine-points  circle,  and  its  centre  N 
is  called  the  nine-points  centre. 


fig.  24. 


THE   TKIANGLE  37 

Ex.  102.     The  circumcircle  of  a  ABC  is  the  9-points  circle  of  A  li  I2  Is- 
Ex.  103.     The  circumcircle  bisects  each  of  the  6  lines  joining  pairs  of 
the  points  I,  l^,  I2,  I3. 

Ex.  104.     If  O  be  equidistant  from  li,  I2,  I3,  then  S  is  the  mid-point 
of  01. 

Ex.  105.     What  is  the  9-points  circle  of  a  BHC  ?  :::  ^p^Ooi'  ^  ^^ 
Ex.  106.     P  is  any  point  on  the  circumcircle  of  a  ABC.     PL,  PM,  PN 
are  l  to  BC,  CA,  AB  respectively.     Prove  that 
(i)     zPNL  =  180°  -  z  PBC.  ^ 

(ii)    zPNM=zPAM. 
(iii)    ZPNL+  zPNM  =  180°. 
(iv)   LNM  is  a  straight  line. 

Theorem  20. 
If  from  P,  a  point  on  the  circumcircle,  perpendiculars 
PL,  PM,  PN  be  drawn  to  the  sides  of  a  triangle,  then  lmn 
is  a  straight  line  (the  Simson*  line). 


fig.  25. 

Join  LN,  NM. 
Since  ls  PNB,  PLB  are  rt.  l  s, 

.*.       L   PNL     =::180°-Z.   PBC. 

Again,  since  l  s  PNA,  PMA  are  rt.   l  s, 
.-.    z.PNM  =  z.PAM. 
But   ^PAM-=180°-Z.PAC 
=  Z.  PBC, 
.'.    z.  s  PNL,  PNM  are  supplementary, 
.".  LNM  is  a  straight  line. 

*  Eobert  Simson  (1687-1768),  professor  of  mathematics  at  Glasgow ; 
author  of  several  works  on  ancient  geometry,  and,  in  particular,  of  an  edition 
of  Euclid's  Elements  on  which  most  modern  editions  are  based. 


38  THE   TRIANGLE 

Ex.  107.     State  and  prove  a  true  converse  of  Th.  20. 

Ex.  108.  Draw  a  figure  for  Th.  20  with  P  on  arc  BC ;  does  the  proof 
need  any  modification  ? 

Ex.  109.  What  is  the  Simson  Hne  of  A  ?  of  the  point  on  the  circum- 
circle  diametrically  opposite  to  A  ? 

Ex.  IIO.  AD  meets  the  circumcircle  in  X;  the  Simson  line  of  X  is 
parallel  to  the  tangent  at  A. 

Ex.  111.  Al  meets  the  circumcircle  in  U  ;  the  Simson  line  of  U  bi- 
sects BC. 

Ex.  112.  If  PL  meets  the  circumcircle  in  U,  AU  is  parallel  to  the 
Simson  line. 

Ex.  113.  The  altitude  from  A  is  produced  to  meet  the  circumcircle  in 
X,  and  X  is  joined  to  a  point  P  on  the  circumcircle.  PX  meets  the  Simson 
line  of  P  in  R  ;  and  BC  in  Q.     Prove  that  R  is  the  mid-point  of  PQ. 

Ex.  114.     In  Ex.  113  show  that  HQ  is  parallel  to  the  Simson  line  of  P. 

Ex.  115.  From  Ex.  114  deduce  that  the  line  joining  a  point  on 
the  circumcircle  to  the  orthocentre  is  bisected  by  the  Simson  line  of 
the  point. 

Ex.  116.  Prove  the  last  exercise  with  the  following  construction  :  take 
image  2?  of  P  in  BC  ;  join  ^H,  PX,  and  prove  pH  parallel  to  the  Simson  line 
of  P. 

Ex.  117.  Given  four  straight  lines,  find  a  point  such  that  its  projections 
on  the  four  lines  are  collinear. 

Ex.  118.  Given  four  straight  lines,  prove  that  the  circumcircle  of  the 
four  triangles  formed  by  the  lines  have  a  common  point.  Show  that  this  is 
the  focus  of  the  parabola  that  touches  the  four  lines. 


THE   TRIANGLE  39 


Exercises  on  Chapter  IV. 

Ex.  110.  Given  the  base,  the  circumradius,  and  the  difference  of  the 
base  angles  of  a  triangle,  show  how  to  construct  the  triangle. 

Ex.  120.  Two  vertices  B,  C  of  a  triangle  are  fixed,  and  the  third  vertex 
A  moves  in  a  straight  line  through  B.  Prove  that  the  locus  of  the  ortho- 
centre  is  a  straight  line.  What  is  the  locus  of  the  circumcentre  ?  of  the  in- 
centre  ?  of  the  centroid  ?  of  the  point  where  the  altitude  from  A  meets  the 
circumcircle  ? 

Ex.  121.  If  a  series  of  trapezia  be  formed  by  drawing  parallels  to  the 
base  of  a  triangle,  the  locus  of  the  intersections  of  the  diagonals  of  these 
trapezia  is  a  median  of  the  triangle. 

Ex.  122.  The  base  BC  of  a  triangle  ABC  is  divided  at  P,  so  that 
mBP  =  nPC  ;  prove  that 

mAB2  +  n  AC2  =  (m  +  n)  (AP2+BP.  PC). 

Ex.  123.  The  lines  joining  the  circumcentre  to  the  vertices  of  a  triangle 
are  perpendicular  to  the  sides  of  the  pedal  triangle. 

Ex.  124.    Construct  a  triangle,  given  : 

(i)      two  sides  and  a  median  (2  cases), 

(ii)      a  side  and  two  medians  (2  cases), 

(iii)     the  three  medians, 

(iv)      the  base,  the  difference  of  the  two  sides,  and  the  difference  of 
the  base  angles, 

(v)       the  base,  a  base  angle,  and  the  sum  or  difference  of  the  two 
other  sides, 

(vi)     the  base,  the  vertical  angle,  and  the  sum  or  difference  of  the 
two  other  sides, 

(vii)     the  feet  of  the  three  perpendiculars, 

(viii)     an  angle,  an  altitude  and  the  perimeter  (2  cases), 

(ix)      a  side,  one  of  the  adjacent  angles,  and  the  length  of  the  bisector 
of  this  angle, 


40  THE   TRIANGLE 

(x)       the  sum  of  two  sides,  and  the  angles, 

(xi)      the  perimeter  and  the  angles, 

(xii)      an  angle,  the  length  of  its  bisector,  and  one  of  the  altitudes 
(2  cases), 

(xiii)     the  angles  and  an  altitude, 

(xiv)     the  base,  the  sum  of  two  other  sides,  and  the  difference  of  the 
base  angles. 

Ex.  125.  Construct  a  triangle  having  given  the  orthocentre,  the  circum- 
centre,  and  the  position  (not  length)  of  one  of  the  sides. 

Ex.  126.  Construct  a  triangle  given  the  circumcircle,  the  orthocentre 
and  one  vertex. 

Ex.  127.  The  magnitude  of  the  angle  A  of  a  triangle  ABC,  and  the 
lengths  of  the  two  medians  which  pass  through  A  and  B  are  known.  Con- 
struct the  triangle. 

Ex.  128.  The  median  through  A  of  the  triangle  AEF  makes  the  same 
angle  with  AB  as  does  Aa  with  AC. 

Ex.  129.  If  perpendiculars  OX,  OY,  OZ  be  drawn  from  any  point  O  to 
the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB  of  a  triangle, 

BX2  +  CY2  +  AZ2  =  CX2  +  AY2+BZ2. 
State  and  prove  a  converse  theorem. 

Ex.  130.  If  liX,  I2Y,  I3Z  be  drawn  perpendicular  to  BC,  CA,  AB  respec- 
tively, these  three  lines  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  131.    Let  A I  produced  meet  the  circumcircle  in  K.     Prove  that 
KB  =  KC  =  KI. 

Draw  KK',  a  diameter  of  the  circumcircle ;  and  draw  lY  1  to  AC.     Prove 
that  AS  K'KC,  AIY  are  similar. 

Hence  show  that  IA.IK=:2Rr;  i.e.  that  the  rectangle  contained  by  the 
segments  of  any  chord  of  the  circumcircle  drawn  through  the  incentre  =  2Rr. 

Ex.  132.     From  Ex.  131  deduce  that  S|2=R2_2Rr. 

Ex.  133.  Upon  a  given  straight  line  AB  any  triangle  ABC  is  described 
having  a  given  vertical  angle  ACB.  AD,  BE  are  the  perpendiculars  from 
A,  B  upon  the  sides  BC,  CA  meeting  them  in  D  and  E  respectively.  Prove 
that  the  circumcentre  of  the  triangle  CED  is  at  a  constant  distance  from 
DE. 


THE   TRIANGLE  41 

Ex.  134.  The  triangle  ABC  has  a  right  angle  at  C,  and  AEFB,  ACGH 
are  squares  described  outside  the  triangle.  Show  that  if  K  be  taken  on  AC 
(produced  if  necessary)  so  that  AK  is  equal  to  BC,  then  A  is  the  centroid  of 
the  triangle  HEK. 

Ex.  135.  If  four  circles  be  drawn,  each  one  touching  three  sides  of  a 
given  quadrilateral,  the  centres  of  the  four  circles  are  concyclic. 

Ex.  136.  The  orthocentre  of  a  triangle  ABC  is  H,  and  the  midde  point 
of  BC  is  D.  Show  that  DH  meets  the  circumcircle  at  the  end  of  the  diameter 
through  A,  and  also  at  the  point  of  intersection  of  the  circumcircle  with  the 
circle  on  AD  as  diameter. 

Ex.  137.  ABC  is  a  triangle,  right-angled  at  A;  DEF  is  a  straight  line 
perpendicular  to  BC,  and  cutting  BC,  CA,  AB  in  E,  F,  D  respectively.  BF, 
CD  meet  at  P.     Find  the  locus  of  P. 

Ex.  138.  Two  fixed  tangents  OP,  OQ  are  drawn  to  a  fixed  circle;  a 
variable  tangent  meets  the  fixed  tangents  in  X,  Y.  Prove  (i)  that  the  peri- 
meter of  the  triangle  OXY  is  constant,  (ii)  that  XY  subtends  a  fixed  angle  at 
the  centre  of  the  circle. 

Ex.  139.  Prove  that  z  SAH  is  the  difference  between  the  angles  B  and 
C.  Hence  construct  a  triangle,  having  given  the  nine-points  circle,  the 
orthocentre,  and  the  difference  between  two  of  its  angles.  Is  there  any 
ambiguity  ? 

Ex.  140.  The  lines  joining  I  to  the  ex-centres  are  bisected  by  the  cir- 
cumcircle. 

Ex.  141.  The  circle  BIC  cuts  AB,  AC  in  E,  F;  prove  that  EF  touches 
the  in- circle. 

Ex.  142.  The  triangle  formed  by  the  circumcentres  of  AHB,  BHC, 
CHA  is  congruent  with  ABC. 

Ex.  143.  Through  C,  the  middle  point  of  the  arc  ACB  of  a  circle,  any 
chord  CP  is  drawn,  cutting  the  straight  line  AB  in  Q.  Show  that  the  locus 
of  the  centre  of  the  circle  circumscribing  the  triangle  BQP  is  a  straight 
line. 

Ex.  144.  A  circle  is  escribed  to  the  side  BC  of  a  triangle  ABC  touching 
the  other  sides  in  F  and  G.  A  tangent  DE  is  drawn  parallel  to  BC,  meeting 
the  sides  in  D,  E.  DE  is  found  to  be  three  times  BC  in  length.  Show  that 
DE  is  twice  AF. 


42  THE   TRIANGLE 

Ex.  145.  Two  triangles  ABC,  DEF  are  inscribed  in  the  same  circle  so 
that  AD,  BE,  CF  meet  in  a  point  O;  prove  that,  if  O  be  the  in-centre  of 
one  of  the  triangles,  it  will  be  the  orthocentre  of  the  other. 

Ex.  146.  If  equilateral  triangles  be  described  on  the  sides  of  a  triangle 
(all  outside  or  all  inside),  the  lines  joining  the  vertices  of  the  triangle  to  the 
vertices  of  the  opposite  equilateral  triangles  are  equal  and  concurrent. 

Ex.  147.  If  on  the  sides  of  any  triangle  three  equilateral  triangles  be 
constructed,  the  in-centres  of  these  triangles  form  another  equilateral 
triangle. 

Ex.  148.  Construct  a  triangle  having  given  the  centres  of  its  inscribed 
circle  and  of  two  of  its  ex-circles. 

Ex.  149.  The  circumcentre  of  the  triangle  BI^C  lies  on  the  circumcircle 
of  ABC. 

Ex.  ISO.  Construct  a  triangle  given  the  base,  vertical  angle  and  in- 
radius. 

Ex.  151.  A  pair  of  common  tangents  to  the  nine-points  circle  and  cir- 
cumcircle meet  at  the  orthocentre. 

Ex.  152.  On  the  sides  AB,  AC  of  a  triangle  ABC  any  two  points  N,  M 
are  taken  concyclic  with  B,  C.  If  NC,  MB  intersect  in  P,  then  the  bisector 
of  the  angle  between  AP  and  the  line  joining  the  middle  points  of  BC,  AP 
makes  a  constant  angle  with  BC. 

Ex.  153.  Any  line  from  the  orthocentre  to  the  circumference  of  the 
circumcircle  is  bisected  by  the  nine-points  circle. 

Ex.  154.  If  P  be  any  point  on  the  circumcircle  and  parallels  to  PA,  PB, 
PC  respectively  be  drawn  through  a,  j3,  y,  the  mid-points-of  the  sides,  prove 
that  these  parallels  intersect  in  the  same  point  on  the  nine-points  circle. 

Ex.  155.  If  perpendiculars  are  drawn  from  the  orthocentre  of  a  triangle 
ABC  on  the  bisectors  of  the  angle  A,  show  that  their  feet  are  collinear  with 
the  middle  point  of  BC. 

Ex.  156.  If  two  circles  are  such  that  one  triangle  can  be  inscribed  in 
the  one  and  circumscribed  to  the  other,  show  that  an  infinite  number  of 
such  triangles  can  be  so  constructed. 

Prove  that  the  locus  of  the  orthocentre  of  these  triangles  is  a  circle. 


THE    TRIANGLE  43 

Ex.  157.  The  triangle  ABC  has  a  right  angle  at  A.  AD  is  the  perpen- 
dicular from  A  on  BC.  O,  O'  are  the  centres  of  the  circles  inscribed  in  the 
triangles  ABD,  ACD  respectively.  Prove  that  the  triangle  ODO'  is  similar  to 
ABC. 

Ex.  158.  If  D,  E,  F  be  the  feet  of  the  perpendiculars  from  a  point  on 
the  circumcircle  upon  the  sides,  find  the  position  of  the  point  so  that  DE 
may  be  equal  to  EF. 

Ex.  159.  From  P,  a  point  on  the  circumcircle  of  a  triangle  ABC,  perpen- 
diculars PL,  PM,  PN  are  drawn  to  the  sides.  Prove  that  the  rectangles 
PL  .  MN,  PM  .  NL,  PN  .  LM  are  proportional  to  the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB. 

Ex.  160.  The  Simson  line  of  a  point  P  rotates  at  half  the  rate  at 
which  P  rotates  about  the  centre  of  the  circle. 

Ex.  161.  The  Simson  lines  of  opposite  ends  of  a  diameter  of  the 
circumcircle  are  at  right  angles  to  one  another. 

Ex.  162.  Find  the  three  points  on  the  circle  circumscribing  the  triangle 
ABC  such  that  the  pedal  lines  of  the  points  with  respect  to  the  triangle  are 
perpendicular  to  the  medians  of  the  triangle. 

Ex.  163.  P,  Q,  R  are  three  points  taken  on  the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB 
respectively  of  a  triangle  ABC.  Show  that  the  circles  circumscribing  the 
triangles  AQR,  BRP,  CPQ  meet  at  a  point,  which  is  fixed  relatively  to  the 
triangle  ABC  if  the  angles  of  the  triangle  PQR  are  given. 

If  PQR  is  similar  to  ABC  show  that  this  point  is  the  orthocentre  of  PQR 
and  the  circumcentre  of  ABC. 

Ex.  164.  A  straight  line  AB  of  constant  length  has  its  extremities  on 
two  fixed  straight  lines  OX,  OY  respectively.  Show  that  the  locus  of  the 
orthocentre  of  the  triangle  CAB  is  a  circle. 

Ex.  166.  Find  the  locus  of  a  point  such  that  its  projections  upon  three 
given  straight  lines  are  collinear. 

Ex.  166.  The  circumcircle  of  the  triangle  formed  by  any  three  of  the 
four  common  tangents  to  two  circles  passes  through  the  middle  point  of  the 
line  joining  their  centres. 

Ex.  167.  If  one  of  the  angles  of  the  triangle  be  half  a  right  angle, 
prove  that  the  line  joining  the  orthocentre  to  the  centre  of  the  circumcircle 
is  bisected  by  the  line  joining  two  of  the  feet  of  the  perpendiculars  from 
the  angles  upon  the  opposite  sides. 


44  THE   TRIANGLE 

Ex.  168.  B,  C  are  fixed  points,  A  a  variable  point  on  a  fixed  circle  which 
passes  through  B  and  C.  Show  that  the  centres  of  the  four  circles  which 
touch  the  sides  of  the  triangle  ABC  are  at  the  extremities  of  diameters  of  two 
other  fixed  circles. 

Ex.  169.  The  bisector  of  the  angle  BAG  meets  BC  in  Y ;  X  is  the  point 
on  BC  such  that  BX  =  YC,  XC=BY  ;  prove  that 

AX2-AY2  =  (AB-AC)2. 

Ex.  170.  A  straight  line  PQ  is  drawn  parallel  to  AB  to  meet  the  circum- 
circle  of  the  triangle  ABC  in  the  points  P  and  Q ;  show  that  the  pedal 
lines  of  P  and  Q.  intersect  on  the  perpendicular  from  C  on  AB. 

Ex.  171.  From  a  point  P  on  the  circumcircle  of  a  triangle  are  drawn 
lines  meeting  the  sides  in  L,  M,  N,  and  making  with  the  perpendiculars  to 
these  sides  equal  angles  in  the  same  sense.  Show  that  L,  M,  N  are  collinear. 
What  does  this  theorem  lead  to  when  the  equal  angles  are  90°  ? 

Ex.  172.  If,  with  a  given  point  P,  lines  LMN,  L'M'N'  are  drawn  as  in 
the  preceding  exercise,  by  taking  angles  6,  d\  prove  that  the  angle  between 
LMN  and  L'M'N' is  d-d'. 

Ex.  173.  Prove  that  the  envelope  of  all  lines  LMN  (see  Ex.  171) 
obtained  from  a  fixed  point  P  by  varying  the  angle  is  a  parabola  with 
focus  P  and  touching  the  sides  of  the  triangle.  What  relation  does  the 
Simson  line  bear  to  this  parabola  ? 

Ex.  174.  Prove  that  all  triangles  inscribed  in  the  same  circle  equi- 
angular to  each  other  are  equal  in  all  respects. 

Ex.  175.  The  altitude  of  an  equilateral  triangle  is  equal  to  a  side  of  an 
equilateral  triangle  inscribed  in  a  circle  described  on  one  of  the  sides  of  the 
original  triangle  as  diameter. 

Ex.  176.  ABC,  A'B'C  are  two  triangles  equiangular  to  each  other 
inscribed  in  a  circle  AA'BB'CC.  The  pairs  of  sides  BC,  B'C;  CA,  C'A'; 
AB,  A'B'  intersect  in  a,  b,  c  respectively. 

Prove  that  the  triangle  abc  is  equiangular  to  the  triangle  ABC. 

Ex.  177.  Prove  that  all  triangles  described  about  the  same  circle  equi- 
angular to  each  other  are  equal  in  all  respects. 


THE   TRIANGLE  45 

Ex.  178.  If  ABC,  A'B'C  be  two  equal  triangles  described  about  a  circle 
in  the  same  sense;  and  the  pairs  of  sides  BC,  B'C;  CA,  C'A';  AB,  A'B' 
meet  in  a,  b,  c  respectively ;  then  a,  b,  c  are  equidistant  from  the  centre  of 
the  circte. 

Ex.  179.  P  is  a  point  on  the  circle  circumscribing  the  triangle  ABC. 
The  pedal  line  of  P  cuts  AC  and  BC  in  M  and  L.  Y  is  the  foot  of  the 
perpendicular  from  P  on  the  pedal  line.  Prove  that  the  rectangles  PY,  PC, 
and  PL,  PM  are  equal. 


CHAPTER  V. 

THE  THEOREMS  OF  CEYA  AND  MENELAUS. 
Lemma  2. 

If  two  triangles  have  the  same  height,  their  areas  are 
to  one  another  in  the  ratio  of  their  bases. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 


Theorem  21. 
(The  Theorem  op  Ceva*.) 

If  the  lines  joining  a  point  o  to  the  vertices  of  a 
triangle  abc  meet  the   opposite  sides  in  x,  Y,  z,  then 

BX     CY     AZ 

—  . — .  —  =  — 1,   the   sense    of   lines  being   taken   into 
cx     AY    BZ  ° 

account. 

*  The  theorem  was  first  published  by  Giovanni   Ceva,  an   ItaHan,   in 
1678. 


THEOREMS  OF  CEVA  AND  MENELAUS 


47 


fig.  26. 

By  drawing  various  figures  and  placing  the  point  O  in  the 
7  possible  different  regions,  the  reader  may  see  that  of  the  ratios 

,  either   3  or   1  must  be  negative.     The  product 


BX 


AZ 


CY 
CX'    AY'     BZ 

therefore  is  negative;  and,  for  the  rest,  it  is  sufficient  to  confine 
our  attention  to  the  numerical  values  of  the  ratios. 


BX 
CX 


AABX 
^ACX 


AOBX 


A  OCX 
AABX-  AOBX 


Lemma  2 


Similarly 


AACX 
_  AAOB 
"  AAOC* 
CY       A  BOC 
AY 
AZ 

BZ  A  COB 
BX  CY  AZ 
CX"  AY*  BZ 


A  OCX 


A  BOA 
A.COA 


1     (numerically), 


=  —  1  when  sense  is  taken  into  account. 


48  theorems  of  ceva  and  menelaus 

Theorem  22. 
(Converse  of  Ceva's  Theorem.) 
If  points  X,  Y,  z  are  taken  on  the  sides  BC,  CA,  ab  of  a 

BX      CY     AZ 

triangle,  such  that  -^ .  — .  —  =^-1,  then  are  ax,  by,  cz 
ex    AY    BZ  '       ' 

concurrent. 


If  AX,  BY,  CZ  are  not  concurrent,  let  BY,  CZ  meet  in  O,  and 
let  AC  (produced  if  necessary)  meet  BC  in  X'. 
^,         BX'     CY     AZ 
^•'«"cX'-AY-^  =  -l <C--) 

CX     AY     BZ 

BX'       BX 

.*.     — -J  ~  —  (sense  being  taken  into  account). 
CX       CX 

.*.    X'  coincides  with  X, 
and  AX,   BY,  CZ   are  concurrent. 

BX'      BX 
Ex.  180.     If  ^^^r^,  =  ^i^^  ,  where  sense  is  not  taken  into  account,  can  it 

be  inferred  that  X'  coincides  with  X  ? 

Ex.  181.     Using  Ceva  or  its  converse  (be  careful  to  state  which  you  are 
using),  prove  the  concurrence 

(i)  of  the  medians  of  a  triangle; 
(ii)  of  the  bisectors  of  its  angles ; 
(iii)  of  its  altitudes. 

Ex.  182.     If  AZ  :ZB  =  AY:YC,  show  that  the  line  joining  A  to  the 
intersection  of  BY  and  CZ  is  a  median. 


THEOREMS  OF  CEVA  AND  MENELAUS         49 

Ex.  183.  X,  X'  are  points  on  BC  such  that  BX  =  X'C.  The  pomts 
Y,  Y';  Z,  Z'  are  similarly  related  pairs  of  points  on  CA,  AB.  If  AX,  BY, 
CZ  are  concurrent,  so  also  are  AX',  BY',  CZ'. 

Ex.  184.  The  lines  joining  the  vertices  to  the  points  of  contact  of  the 
in-circle  with  the  opposite  sides  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  185.  The  lines  joining  the  vertices  to  the  points  of  contact  of  the 
corresponding  ex-circles  with  the  opposite  sides  are  concurrent. 

Theorem  23. 
(The  Theorem  op  Menelaus"^.) 

If  a  straight  line  cuts  the  sides  of  a  triangle  abc  in 

BL    CM    AN        ,    ^-  „  ..  ,    . 

L,  M,  N,  then  —  .  —  .  — ==  +  1,  the  sense  of  lines  being 

'       '       '  CL     AM     BN  '  ^ 

taken  into  account. 


As  in  Ceva's  theorem,   the  reader  may  satisfy  himself  that 

of   the   ratios  — , ,  — ,   either  2   or  0   are  nearative.     The 

CL     AM'   BN  ^ 

product  therefore  is  positive.      For  the  rest  of  the  proof  the 

sense  of  lines  will  be  disregarded. 

Let  the  perpendiculars  from  A,  B,  C  upon  LMN  be  of  lengths 

a,  13,  y. 

BL  _  13       CM  _  y       AN  _  a 

CL~y'     AM~a'     BN~J8* 

.      BL     CM     AN      _  .     „ 

. .    —  .  —  .  —  =1  numerically 
CL     AM      BN  "^ 

=  +  1  when  sense  is  taken  into  account. 
*  Menelaus  of  Alexandria,  about  98  a.d. 
G.  s.  M.  G.  4 


Then 


50  theorems  of  ceva  and  menelaus 

Theorem  24. 
(The  Converse  of  Menelaus'  Theorem.) 
If  points  L,    M,    N  are  taken  on  the  sides  BC,  CA,  ab 

of  a  triangle,  such  that  —  .  —  .  —  =+1,  then  are  L,  M,  N 

CL     AM     BN 

collinear. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 

Ex.  186.    Prove  theorem  24. 

Ex.  187.     Use  the  above  theorems  to  prove  the  theorem  of  the  Simson 
line  (Th.  20). 

[Let  z  PAB  =  ^,  then  AN=APcos^,  etc.] 

Ex.   188.     If  points  Q,  R  are  taken  on  AB,   AC  so  that  AQ  =  2QB, 
AR  =  iRC,  and  QR  produced  meets  BC  in  P,  find  PB  :  PC. 

Ex.  189.    The  bisectors  of  z  s  B  and  C  meet  the  opposite  sides  in  Q,  R, 
and  QR  meets  BC  in  P;  prove  that  AP  is  the  exterior  bisector  of   z  A. 

Ex.   190.     a,  /8,  7  are  the  mid-points  of  the  sides  ;  Aa  meets  J87  in  P  ; 
CP  meets  AB  in  Q.     Show  that  AQ  =  i  AB. 


Exercises  on  Chapter  Y. 

Ex.  191.  A  straight  line  cuts  the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB  of  a  triangle  in 
L,  M,  N  respectively.  The  join  of  A  to  the  intersection  of  BM,  CN  meets  BC 
in  P.     Show  that  BC  is  divided  in  the  same  ratio  at  L  and  P. 

Ex.  192.  The  sides  BC,  CA,  AB  of  a  triangle  ABC  are  divided  in- 
ternally by  points  A',  B',  C  so  that  BA' :  A'CzrCB'  :  B'Arr  AC  :  C'B.  Also 
B'C  produced  cuts  BC  externally  in  A".     Prove  that 

BA":CA"  =  CA'2:A'B2. 

Ex.  193.     Points  P,  P'  are  taken  on  BC  such  that  PB  =  CP',  and  CB, 

AB,  AC  are  bisected  in  O,  K,  L  respectively.    Prove  that  the  intersections  of 
OL  with  AP  and  of  KP  with  LP'  are  collinear  with  B. 

Ex.  194.     X  is  any  point  on  llj ;  BX,  CX  meet  AC,  AB  in  Q,  R  ;  QR 

meets  BC  in  U,     Show  that  UI2I3  is  a  straight  line. 


THEOREMS  OF  CEVA  AND  MENELAUS         51 

Ex.  195.  The  lines  EF,  FD,  DE,  which  join  the  points  of  contact 
D,  E,  F  of  the  inscribed  circle  of  a  triangle  with  the  sides,  cut  the  opposite 
sides  in  X,  Y,  Z.     Prove  that  X,  Y,  Z  are  coUinear. 

Ex.  196.  A  transversal  through  P,  on  BC  produced,  cuts  off  equal 
lengths  BR,  CQ  from  the  sides  AB,  AC  of  a  triangle.     Show  that 

PQ:PR  =  AB:AC. 

Ex.  197.  If  AD,  BE,  CF  are  concurrent  straight  lines  meeting  the 
sides  of  the  triangle  ABC  in  D,  E,  F  respectively,  and  the  circle  DEF  cuts 
the  sides  again  in  D',  E',  F',  prove  that  AD',  BE',  CF'  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  198.  llirough  a  point  F  on  the  diagonal  BD  of  a  square  A  BCD 
lines  are  drawn  parallel  to  the  sides  to  meet  AB  in  G,  BC  in  E,  CD  in  K, 
and  DA  in  H.     Prove  that  BH,  CF,  and  DG  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  199.  ABC  is  a  triangle  right-angled  at  C  ;  P  is  any  point  on  AB. 
Perpendiculars  are  let  fall  from  P  on  CA  and  CB.  The  line  joining  the  feet 
of  these  perpendiculars  meets  AB  in  Q.  Prove  that  2P0.  PQ=PA.  PB 
where  O  is  the  mid-point  of  AB. 


Ex.  200.  DEF  is  the  pedal  triangle  of  ABC  ;  O  lies  on  AD  ;  OE,  OF 
meet  DF,  DE  in  Y,  Z.     Show  that  FE,  YZ,  BC  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  201.  S  is  a  point  on  the  side  QR  of  a  triangle  PQR.  The  lines 
joining  S  to  the  mid-points  of  PQ,  PR  meet  PR,  PQ  at  T,  U  respectively. 
TU  meets  QR  at  V.    Prove  that  QV  :  RV=  SQ'-^ :  RS^. 


Ex.  202.  If  the  in-circle  touch  AB  in  Z,  and  the  circle  escribed  to  BC 
touch  AC  in  Yi,  then  ZYi  is  divided  by  BC  in  the  ratio  AC  :  AB. 

Ex.  203.  A  line  drawn  through  the  vertex  A  of  a  square  ABCD  meets 
the  sides  BC,  CD  in  E  and  F;  DE  and  BF  meet  in  G  ;  CG  meets  AD 
in  H.     Prove  that  DF^DH. 


Ex.  204.  The  sides  A B,  CD  of  a  quadrilateral  ACDB  are  parallel;  CA, 
DB  meet  in  E,  CB,  AD  meet  in  H,  and  CB,  AD  meet  FEG,  a  parallel  to  AB, 
in  G  and  F  respectively.     Show  that  AG,  BF,  and  EH  are  concurrent. 

4—2 


52         THEOREMS  OF  CEVA  AND  MENELAUS 

Ex.  205.  The  line  CF  cuts  the  side  AB  of  a  triangle  ABC  in  a  point  F 
such  that  AF  :  FB=:w  :  1;  and  lines  are  drawn  through  A  and  B  parallel  to 
the  opposite  sides.  Show  that  the  ratios  of  the  area  of  the  triangle  formed 
by  these  lines  and  CF  to  the  area  of  the  triangle  ABC  is  (1  -  n)^  :  w. 

Ex.  206.  D,  E,  F  are  points  on  the  sides  of  a  triangle  ABC,  and  AD, 
BE,  CF  meet  in  O.    Prove  that 

OP      OE      OF 
AD"^BE'^CF"" 


CHAPTER    VI. 


HARMONIC    SECTION. 

[Throughout  this  chapter,  the  sense  of  lines  will  be  taken  into  account.li 

Definition.     If  a  straight  line  AB  is  divided  at  two  points 

AC  /AD 
C,    D   so   that   — /  —  =  -1,   it   is   said   to  be   divided   har- 

CB/  DB  ' 

monically;  A,  C,  B,  D  are  said  to  form  a  harmonic  range; 
and  C  and  D  are  called  harmonic  conjugates  with  respect 
to  A  and  B. 

Note  that  the  above  definition  is  the  same  as  the  following.  If  a  straight 
line  is  divided  internally  and  externally  in  the  same  ratio,  it  is  said  to  be 
divided  harmonically. 

AC 
Ex.  207.     Take  a  line  AB  6  cm.  long;  divide  it  at  C  so  that  =^=2; 

Cb 

find  the  point  D  such  that  C,  D  divide  AB  harmonically. 

Ex.  208.     Kepeat  Ex.  207  with  (i)  ^  =  1,  (ii)  ^=  -2,  (iii)  ^=  -|. 

Ex.  209.  If  AB  is  divided  harmonically  at  C,  D,  then  CD  is 
divided  harmonically  at  A,  B. 

Ex.  210.     Draw  a  scalene  triangle  ABO;  draw  the  internal  and  external 

bisectors  of  the  angle  at  O  and  let  them  cut  the  base  in  C  and  D.    Calculate 

AC  /AD 
(from  actual  measurements)  ^^  /  --.    Is  A,  C,  B,  D  a  harmonic  range? 

Ex.  211.  Prove  that  the  internal  and  external  bisectors  of  an 
angle  of  a  triangle  divide  the  opposite  side  of  the  triangle  har- 
monically. 


54  HARMONIC   SECTION 

Definition.     If  A,  C,   B,   D  be  any  four  points  in  a  straight 

line,  —  /— ;:  is  called  their  cross-ratio  and  is  written  {AB,  CD|. 
CB/  DB  I      J        ) 

[The  cross-ratio  {AB,  CD}  is  the  ratio  of  the  ratios  in  which  C  and  D 
divide  AB.] 

We  see  that,  if   {AB,  CD}  =  —  1,  A,  C,   B,   D   is  a  harmonic 
range. 


Theorem  25. 
If  {AB,  CD}  -  -  1,  then  -i-  +  i-  =  A 

^      '         ^  '  AC       AD       AB 


• — 1 1 1 

A                           C        B 

D 

fig.  30. 

Let  AB  =  £C,  AC  ==  y,  AD  =  2;. 

If  {AB,  CD}  =  -1, 

^,         AC  /AD 
then   ^rzh:-=-\. 
CB/  DB 

•   y  1  ^  -  \ 

"  x-yj  x-z 

.      y            ^ 

x  —  y         X  —  z 

:.  yx-yz  =  -xz  +  yz. 

:.  xz  +  yx=2yz. 

.1       12 

"  y      z~  x' 

1         1         2 

I.e. 1 =:  —  . 

AC      AD      AB 

.*.    AC,  AB,  AD  are  in  harmonic  progression;  hence  the  name 
'harmonic  range.* 

Ex.  212.    Prove  that  the  same  property  is  true  for  the  distances  measured 
from  any  one  of  the  four  points. 


HARMONIC  SECTION  55 


Theorem  26. 

If  A  B  is  divided  harmonically  at  c,  D,  and  if  o  is  the 
midpoint  of  ab,  then  oc  .  OD  =: OB^ 


C        8 

;.  31. 


Let  OB  =  b,  OC  =  c,  OD  =  c? ;  then  AO  =  h. 
If    {AB,  CD}  =  -1, 


then^/^=.-l. 
.      CB/  DB 

b  +  G  /b  +  d 


b-cj  b-d 
.      6  +  c        b  +  d 


' '    b  —  G        b  —  d' 
.'.    b'^  +  bc  —  bd-cd^-b^-bd  +  bc  +  cd. 
:.  2b''=2cd. 
:.    ¥  =  cd. 

i.e.   OB^r.  OC.OD. 

Ex.  213.     Prove  the  converse  of  the  above  proposition,  namely,  that  if 
O  is  the  mid-point  of  AB  and  OC  .  0D  =  0B2,  then  {AB,  CD}  =  - 1. 

Ex.  214.     If  {AB,  CD}  =  - 1  and  P  is  the  mid-point  of  CD,  then 
PA  .  PB  =  PC2. 

Ex.  215.    If  AB  is  divided  harmonically  at  C,  D  and  if  O  is  the  mid- 
point of  AB  and  P  of  CD,  prove  that  OB2+  PC2  =  OP2. 

Ex.  216.    If  {AB,  CD}  =  -  1,  what  is  the  position  of  D  when  C  coincides 
with  (i)  A,  (ii)  the  mid-point  of  AB,  (iii)  B,  (iv)  the  point  at  infinity. 

Ex.  217.     Prove  that  if  ACBD  be  a  harmonic  range  and  if  O  be  the 
middle  point  of  CD,  then  AC  is  to  CB  as  AO  to  CO. 


66  HARMONIC   SECTION 

Ex.  218.  P,  Q  divide  a  diameter  of  a  circle  harmonically;  P',  Q'  divide 
another  diameter  harmonically ;  prove  that  P,  P',  Q,  Q'  are  concyclic. 

Ex.  219.  If  X,  Y,  Z  are  the  points  at  which  the  in-circle  of  a  triangle 
ABC  touches  the  sides,  and  if  YZ  produced  cuts  the  opposite  side  in  X', 
then  X  and  X'  divide  that  side  harmonically. 

[Use  Menelaus'  Theorem.] 

Ex.  220.  Prove  the  same  theorem  for  the  points  of  contact  of  one 
of  the  ex- circles. 


Ex.  221.  On  a  straight  line  take  four  points  A,  C,  B,  D  such  that 
AC  =  l-6  in.,  CB  =  0-8  in.,  BD  =  2-4  in.     What  is  the  value  of  {AB,  CD}? 

Take  any  point  O  outside  the  line.  Draw  a  straight  line  parallel  to  CD 
cutting  OA,  OB,  OC  at  P,  Q,  R.  Find  experimentally  the  value  of  the 
ratio  PR/RQ. 

Again  draw  parallels  to  OA,  OB  or  OC  in  turn,  and  try  to  discover 
a  law. 

Ex.  222.  {AB,  CD}=-1;  O  is  any  point  outside  the  line  ACBD ; 
through  C  draw  PCQ  parallel  to  OD  cutting  OA,  OB  at   P,  Q.     Prove 

PC=:CQ 

[By  means  of  similar  triangles  express  PC/OD  in  terms  of  segments  of 
the  line  ACBD,  and  then  express  CQ/OD  in  the  same  way;] 

Ex.  223.  Prove  the  converse  of  Ex.  222,  namely,  that  if  PC  =  CQ 
thenjAB,  CD}=-1. 

Ex.  224.  Draw  ACBD  as  in  Ex.  221;  take  any  point  O  outside  the  line 
and  join  OA,  00,  OB,  OD;  draw  a  line  cutting  these  lines  at  A',  C,  B',  D'; 
measure  and  calculate  {A'B',  CD'}.  Repeat  the  experiment  for  another 
position  of  A'C'B'D'. 

Ex.  225.  If  a  point  O  be  joined  to  the  points  of  a  harmonic  range 
ACBD  and  these  lines  be  cut  by  a  straight  line  in  A',  C,  B',  D' ;  prove 
that  {A'C'B'D'}  is  harmonic. 

[Through  C  and  C  draw  parallels  to  OD,  and  use  Exs.  222,  223.] 

Definition.     A  system  of  lines  through  a  point  is  called  a 
pencil.     The  point  is  called  the  vertex  of  the  pencil. 

Definitio7b.     Any  straight  line  drawn  across  a  system  of  lines 
is  called  a  transversal. 


HARMONIC   SECTION 


67 


Theorem  27. 

If  a  transversal  cuts  the  four  lines  of  a  pencil  at 
A,  c,  B,  D,  and  if  AC  BD  is  a  harmonic  range,  then  any 
other  transversal  will  also  be  divided  harmonically. 


5r   / 

\, 

A/    C/ 

B 

\D 

Q 

\ 

/ 

B"^ — 

— — —_____^ 

<? 

fig.  32. 

Let  O  be  the  vertex  of  the  pencil. 

Let  a  straight  line  cut  the  rays  of  the  pencil  at  A',  C',  B',  D'. 

Through  C  and  C'  draw  straight  lines  n  to  OD,  cutting  OA 
at  P,   P'  and  OB  at  Q,   Q'. 

(  ':     PC  is    II    to  OD. 

.*.     As  APC,  AOD  are  similar. 
AC      PC 
••     AD  ~0D' 
also    As   BQC,   BOD  are  similar. 
CB      QC 
*  *     DB  ~  O 5 ' 
Since  {AB,  CD}  =  -1, 
AC  /AD 
*  '     CB/  5 B 

AC_      CB 

"     AD~~DB 

PC      _  QC 

db~~OD 

.-.     PC  =  CQ. 


[AB,  CD}=  -1 
.*.  PC  =  CQ 


-1. 


58 


HAKMONIC   SECTION 
O 


fig.  32. 


P'C  =  C'Q' 


fA'B',  C'D' 


Now 

P'C      OC      C'Q' 
PC        OC        CQ 

.* 

.  P'C'  :-  C'Q'. 

^nd  from 

similar  triangles  as  before 

A'C       P'C 
A'D'  ~  OD" 

,   C'B'       Q'C 

and  — r— ,  = 7 . 

D'B'       OD' 

^-li 

A'C'          C'B' 
A'D'  ~      D'B" 

.    A'C  /A'D' 
C'B'/  D'B'  ~ 

•  1 


A'B,'  C'D'}  is  a  harmonic  range. 


Definitio7i.  If  a  pencil  of  four  lines  divides  one  transversal 
(and  therefore  every  transversal*)  harmonically,  the  pencil  is 
called  a  harmonic  pencil. 

0{AB,  CD}  =  -  1  denotes  that  the  pencil  OA,  OB,  OC,  CD  is 
harmonic;  OC  and  CD  are  called  harmonic  conjugates  with 
respect  to  OA  and  OB. 

*  This  follows  from  the  proposition  just  proved. 


HARMONIC   SECTION  59 


Note  on  Theorem  27. 

From  Theorem  26  it  is  easy  to  show  that  if  C  and  D  are  harmonic 
conjugates  with  respect  to  AB,  and  if  D  is  at  infinity,  then  C  is  the  mid- 
point of  AB.     [See  also  p.  8,  §  3  (iii).] 

In  the  course  of  proving  Theorem  27  we  saw  that  a  transversal  PQ 
parallel  to  OD  is  bisected  by  OC  ;  it  should  be  noticed  that  this  is  a 
particular  case  of  the  theorem;  for,  since  PQ  is  parallel  to  OD  it  cuts 
OD  at  infinity;  therefore  C  and  the  point  at  infinity  are  harmonic  con- 
jugates with  respect  to  PQ;  therefore  C  is  the  mid-point  of  PQ. 


Theorem  28. 

The  internal  and  external  bisectors  of  an  angle  are 
harmonic  conjugates  with  respect  to  the  arms  of  the 
angle. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 


Theorem  29. 

If  {AB,  CD}  =  -  1  and  o  is  a  point  outside  the  line  such 
that  z.  COD  is  a  right  angle,  then  oc,  OD  are  the  bisectors 

of  Z.AOB. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 

Ex.  226.  "What  line  is  the  harmonic  conjugate  of  the  median  of  a 
triangle  with  respect  to  the  two  sides  through  the  vertex  from  which  the 
median  is  drawn  ? 

Ex.  227.  If  a,  ^,  7  are  the  mid-points  of  the  sides  of  a  triangle  ABC, 
prove  that  a  {7/8,  AC}  :=  -  1. 

Ex.  228.  If  D,  E,  F  are  the  feet  of  the  altitudes  of  a  triangle  ABC, 
prove  that  D{EF,  AB}=:  -1. 

Ex.  229.  If  X,  Y,  Z  are  the  points  of  contact  of  the  in-circle  and  the 
sides  of  the  triangle  ABC,  prove  that  XJYZ,  AC}=  -  1. 


60  HAEMONIC  SECTION 

Ex.  230.  Lines  are  drawn  parallel  to  the  sides  of  a  parallelogram 
through  the  intersection  of  its  diagonals ;  prove  that  these  lines  and  the 
diagonals  form  a  harmonic  pencil. 

Ex.  231.  If  A,  B,  C,  D  and  A',  B',  C,  D'  are  two  harmonic  ranges  and 
if  AA',  BB',  CC  all  pass  through  a  point  O,  then  O,  D,  D'  are  coUinear. 


Exercises  on  Chapter  YI. 

Ex.  232.  A,  B,  C,  D,  O,  P  are  points  on  a  circle  and  O  {AB,  CD}  =  -  1 ; 
prove  that  P{AB,  CD}  =  - 1. 

Ex.  233.  The  bisector  of  the  angle  A  of  a  triangle  ABC  meets  BC  in  X  ; 
prove  that  AX  is  divided  harmonically  by  the  perpendiculars  drawn  to  it 
from  B  and  C. 

Ex.  234.  The  pencil  formed  by  joining  the  four  angular  points  of  a 
square  to  any  point  on  the  circumscribing  circle  of  the  square  is  harmonic. 

Ex.  235.  A  chord  AB  and  a  diameter  CD  of  a  circle  cut  at  right  angles. 
If  P  be  any  other  point  on  the  circle,  P  (AB,  CD)  is  a  harmonic  pencil. 

Ex.  236.  a,  ^,  y  are  the  mid-points  of  the  sides  of  a  triangle  ABC, 
Aa  and  ^y  intersect  at  X,  a  line  is  drawn  through  X  cutting  07,  a/3,  BC  at 
Y,  Z,  W  respectively;  prove  that  Y,  X,  Z,  W  form  a  harmonic  range. 

Ex.  237.  Three  lines  pass  through  a  point ;  through  a  given  point  on 
one  of  the  lines  draw  a  line  that  shall  be  divided  into  two  equal  parts  by 
the  other  two. 

Ex.  238.  Find  a  point  P  in  a  given  straight  line  so  that  the  lines 
joining  P  to  three  given  points  in  a  plane  containing  the  given  line  may  cut 
off  on  any  line  parallel  to  the  given  line  and  lying  in  the  same  plane  two 
equal  segments. 

Ex.  239.  If  X,  Y,  Z  are  points  on  the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB  of  a 
triangle  such  that  AX,  BY,  CZ  are  concurrent,  and  if  YZ  meets  BC 
in  X'  ;  then  is  {BC,  XX'}   a  harmonic  range. 

Ex.  240.  TP,  TQ  are  two  tangents  to  a  circle;  PR  is  a  diameter  of  the 
circle  and  QN  is  drawn  perpendicular  to  PR.  Prove  that  Q{TPNR}  is  a 
harmonic  pencil. 

Ex.  241.  In  a  triangle  ABC  the  line  AD  is  drawn  bisecting  the  angle  A 
and  meeting  BC  in  D.  Find  a  point  P  in  BC  produced  either  way,  such 
that  the  square  on  PD  may  be  equal  to  the  rectangle  PB  .  PC. 


HARMONIC   SECTION  61 

Ex.  242.  P  is  a  point  on  the  same  straight  line  as  the  harmonic  range 
ABCD  ;  prove  that 

PA      PB      Pp 
AC~BC^DC* 

Ex.  243.  A,  B,  C,  D  are  four  points  in  a  straight  line  ;  find  two  points 
in  the  line  which  are  harmonic  conjugates  with  respect  to  A,  B  and  also 
with  respect  to  C,  D. 

Ex.  244.  ABC  is  a  triangle ;  through  D,  the  mid-point  of  BC,  a 
straight  line  PDQR  is  drawn  cutting  AB,  AC  in  P,  Q  respectively.  AR 
is  drawn  parallel  to  BC,  and  cuts  BQ  at  S.     Prove  that  AR  =  RS. 

Ex.  245.  PAQB  is  a  harmonic  range,  and  a  circle  is  drawn  with  AB  as 
diameter.  A  tangent  from  P  meets  the  tangent  at  B  in  S,  and  touches  the 
circle  in  T.    Prove  that  SA  bisects  TQ. 

Ex.  246.  Through*  one  angle  O  of  a  parallelogram  OEAF  a  line  is 
drawn  meeting  AE  and  AF,  both  produced,  in  B  and  C  respectively. 
Prove  that  the  area  A  EOF  is  a  harmonic  mean  between  the  areas  BOA 
and  COA. 

Ex.  247.  TP,  TQ  are  two  tangents  to  a  circle  ;  PR  is  a  diameter  of  the 
circle  and  QN  is  drawn  perpendicular  to  PR.  Prove  that  QN  is  bisected 
byTR. 

Ex.  248.  If  X  is  any  point  in  AD  an  altitude  of  a  triangle  ABC,  and 
BX,  CX  produced  cut  the  opposite  sides  of  the  triangle  in  Y  and  Z,  then 
Z  YDZ  is  bisected  by  DA. 

Ex.  249.  Prove  that  the  lines  joining  any  point  on  a  circle  to  the  ends 
of  a  fixed  chord  cut  the  diameter  perpendicular  to  the  chord  in  two  points 
which  divide  the  diameter  harmonically. 

Ex.  250.  If  A',  B',  C  lie  on  the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB  of  a  triangle  and 
AA',  BB',  CC  be  concurrent;  and  if  A"  be  the  harmonic  conjugate  of  A' 
with  respect  to  B,  C  while  B",  C"  are  similarly  determined  on  the  other 
sides ;  then  A",  B",  C"  are  collinear. 

Ex.  251.  The  lines  VA',  VB',  VC  bisect  the  internal  angles  formed  by 
the  lines  joining  any  point  V  to  the  angular  points  of  the  triangle  ABC  ; 
and  A'  lies  on  BC,  B'  on  CA,  C  on  AB.  Also  A",  B",  C"  are  harmonic  con- 
jugates of  A',  B',  C  with  respect  to  B  and  C,  C  and  A,  A  and  B.  Prove  that 
A",  B",  C"  are  collinear. 

Ex.  252.  The  inscribed  circle  of  a  triangle  ABC  touches  the  sides  BC, 
CA,  AB  in  A',  B',  C  respectively.  Show  that  the  points  in  which  the 
circles  B'C'B  and  B'C'C  meet  BC  again  are  equidistant  from  A'. 


CHAPTER    VII. 


POLE   AND   POLAR. 


Definition.  The  line  joining  the  points  at  which  two  tangents 
touch  a  circle  is  called  their  chord  of  contact. 

Ex.  253.  If  tangents  are  drawn  to  a  circle  from  an  external  point,  the 
line  joining  this  point  to  the  centre  of  the  circle  bisects  the  chord  of  contact 
at  right  angles. 

Ex.  254.     What  is  the  chord  of  contact  of  a  point  on  the  circumference? 

Provisional  Definition.  If  P  and  Q  are  the  points  of  contact 
of  the  tangents  to  a  circle  from  a  point  T,  the  straight  line 
through  P  and  Q  is  called  the  polar  of  T,  and  T  is  called  the 
pole  of  PQ,  with  respect  to  the  circle. 

This  definition  of  the  polar  of  a  point  is  meaningless  when  the  point  is 
inside  the  circle.  It  will  therefore  be  necessary  to  find  a  new  definition.  But 
before  doing  so  we  must  prove  the  following  theorem. 


POLE   AND  POLAR 


63 


Theorem  30. 

If  the  line  joining  a  point  T  to  the  centre  c  of  a  circle 
cuts  the  chord  of  contact  of  T  in  N  and  the  circle  in  A, 
then  CN  .  CT  ==  ca2. 


fig.  33. 

Let  P  and  Q  be  the  points  of  contact  of  the  tangents  from  T. 
Then,  in  the  As  CPN,  CTP,  z.  C  is  common, 
and  z.  s  CNP,  CPT  are  equal  (being  rt.  l  s). 
.*.   the  As  are  similar. 
CNCP 
CP  ~  cf* 
.-.    CN.CT  =  CP2-^CA2. 

Definition.  If  T  and  N  are  two  points  on  a  line,  drawn  from 
C  the  centre  of  a  circle,  such  that  CN  .  CT  is  equal  to  the  square 
on  a  radius  of  the  circle,  and  if  through  N  a  line  XY  is  drawn  at 
right  angles  to  CN,  XY  is  called  the  polar  of  T  and  T  is  called 
the  pole  of  XY  with  respect  to  the  circle. 


fig.  34. 


64 


POLE  AND   POLAR 


Ex.  255.  Prove  that  this  definition  agrees  with  the  'provisional  defini- 
tion' when  T  is  outside  the  circle. 

Ex.  256.  What  is  the  position  of  the  polar  in  the  following  cases:  (i)  T 
on  the  circle,  (ii)  T  coinciding  with  C,  (iii)  T  at  infinity  ? 

Ex.  257.  A  and  B  are  two  concentric  circles;  what  is  the  envelope  of 
the  polar  with  respect  to  A  of  a  point  which  moves  round  B  ? 

Ex.  258.  What  are  the  polars  of  the  vertices  of  a  triangle  with  respect 
to  (i)  its  incircle,  (ii)  its  circumcircle  ? 

Ex.  259.  ABC  is  a  triangle.  A  circle  is  described  with  A  as  centre  and 
radius  AX  such  that  AX^^  AB .  AF  where  F  is  the  altitude  from  C.  What 
lines  are  the  polars  of  B  and  C?  and  what  point  is  the  pole  of  BC? 

Ex.  260.  If  firoxn  a  fixed  point  T  any  line  is  drawn  cutting  a 
circle  in  R  and  S,  prove  that  tlie  tangents  at  R  and  S  intersect  on 
a  fixed  line  (viz.  the  polar  of  T). 

[Let  X  be  the  point  of  intersection  of  the  tangents;  draw  XN  j.  to 
the  line  joining  T  to  the  centre  C ;  let  CX  cut  RS  in  K.  Prove  that 
CN  .CT  =  CK.CX  =  CS2.] 

Ex.  261.  Prove  that  any  point  T  and  the  polar  of  T  with  respect  to  a 
circle  divide  the  diameter  through  T  harmonically. 


Theorem  31. 

If  a  straight  line  is  drawn  through  any  point  to  cut  a 
circle,  the  line  is  divided  harmonically  by  the  circle,  the 
point  and  the  polar  of  the  point  with  respect  to  the 
circle. 


fig.  36. 


fig.  37. 


POLE   AND    POLAR  65 

Let  T  be  the  point,  TRHS  the  line  cutting  the  circle  at  R,  S 
and  the  polar  of  T  at  H  ;  let  C  be  the  centre  of  the  circle,  and 
let  CT  cut  the  circle  at  A  and  the  polar  of  T  at  N. 

Draw  CK  J-  to  RS ;  then  K  is  the  mid-point  of  RS. 

[If  we  can  prove  KH  .  KT  =  KR-,  then  {RS,  HT}  =  -  L] 

Sense  being  taken  into  account,  we  see  that 

KH.  KT  =  KT(KT-HT) 

^-KT^-KT.  HT. 

Now  in  both  figures  C,  K,  H,  N  are  concyclic,  because  the  L  s 
at  K  and  N  are  right  angles. 

.*.    KT  .  HT  =  CT  .  NT. 

.*.    KH  .KT  =  KT2-CT.NT 

=  KT2-CT(CT-CN) 

=  KT2-CT2  +  CN.CT 

=  -CK2  +  CA2  (CN  .CT=zCA2  by  def.) 

=  CR2-CK^ 

=  KR2. 
.'.    {RS,  HT}  is  harmonic. 

Ex.  262.  If  H  be  the  harmonic  conjugate  of  a  fixed  point  T 
with  regard  to  the  points  in  which  a  line  through  T  cuts  a  fixed 
circle,  the  locus  of  H  is  a  straight  line. 

[Use  reductio  ad  absurdum.] 

Ex.  263.  If  C  be  the  centre  of  a  circle,  and  the  polar  of  a  point  T  cut 
TC  in  N,  and  any  straight  h'ne  through  T  cut  the  circle  in  R  and  S,  then 
the  polar  bisects  the  angle  RNS. 

Ex.  264.  If  a  straight  line  TRS  cut  a  circle  in  R  and  S  and  cut  the 
polar  of  T  in  H,  and  if  K  be  the  mid-point  of  RS,  then  TR  .  TS  =  TH  .  TK. 

Ex.  265.  The  polar  of  a  point  O  with  regard  to  a  circle  meets  it  in 
A,  B ;  any  chord  through  O  meets  the  circle  in  C,  D.  Prove  that  A,  B,  C,  D 
subtend  a  harmonic  pencil  at  any  point  of  the  circle, 

[Consider  the  pencil  subtended  at  A.] 

G.  s.  M.  G.  5 


66  POLE   AND    POLAR 

Ex.  266.  A  chord  PQ  of  a  circle  moves  so  that  the  angle  it  subtends  at 
a  fixed  point  O  inside  the  circle  is  bisected  externally  by  the  diameter  through 
O  ;  prove  that  PQ  passes  through  a  fixed  point. 

Is  this  theorem  true  when  O  is  the  centre  of  the  circle  ? 

Ex.  267.  State  and  prove  a  theorem  corresponding  to  Ex.  344  for  the 
case  in  which  the  diameter  bisects  the  angle  internally,  O  being  still  inside 
the  circle. 

Ex.  268.  A  chord  PQ  of  a  circle  moves  so  that  the  angle  it  subtends  at 
a  fixed  point  O  outside  the  circle  is  bisected  by  the  diameter  which  passes 
through  O ;  prove  that  PQ  either  passes  through  a  fixed  point  or  is  parallel 
to  a  fixed  direction. 

Ex.  269.  Prove  that,  if  the  points  A,  B,  C,  D  all  lie  on  a  circle,  the 
polar  of  the  point  of  intersection  of  AC,  BD  passes  through  the  point  of 
intersection  of  AB,  CD. 

[Let  AB,  CD  intersect  at  X,  and  AC,  BD  at  Y;  find  Z  the  harmonic 
conjugate  of  Y  with  respect  to  B,  D;  let  CA  meet  ZX  in  T;  prove  XT  the 
polar  of  Y.] 


Theorem  32. 

If  the  polar  of  a  point  P  with  respect  to  a  circle  passes 
through  a  point  Q,  then  the  polar  of  Q  passes  through  P. 


fig.  38. 

Let  C  be  the  centre  of  the  circle,  and  QN  the  polar  of  P. 
From  P  draw  PM  x  to  CQ, 


POLE   AND   POLAR  67 

Then  Q,  M,  N,  P  are  coney clic. 

.-.    CM.CQ  =  CN.CP 

=  CAl      ( '.•  QN  is  the  polar  of  P) 
.*.    PM  is  the  polar  of  Q. 

.'.   the  polar  of  Q  passes  through  P. 

Ex.  270.  Sketch  a  figure  for  Theorem  32  with  both  P  and  Q  outside 
the  circle. 

Ex.  271.  Prove  this  theorem  by  the  harmonic  property  of  pole  and 
polar  for  the  particular  case  in  which  PQ  cuts  the  circle. 

Ex.  272.  If  a  point  moves  on  a  straight  line  its  polar  with  respect 
to  a  circle  passes  through  a  fixed  point. 

Ex.  273.  If  a  straight  line  moves  so  that  it  always  passes 
through  a  fixed  point,  its  pole  with  respect  to  a  circle  moves  on  a 
straight  line. 

Ex.  274.  The  line  joining  any  two  points  A  and  B  is  the  polar 
of  the  point  of  intersection  of  the  polar s  of  A  and  B. 

Ex.  275.  AB,  AC  touch  a  circle  at  B,  C.  If  the  tangent  at  any  other 
point  P  cuts  BC  produced  at  Q,  prove  that  Q  is  the  pole  of  AP. 

Ex.  276.  AB,  AC  touch  a  circle  at  B,  C  ;  the  tangent  at  another  point 
P  on  the  circle  cuts  BC  at  Q.     Prove  that  A{BC,  PQ}  =  - 1. 


5-2 


68 


POLE   AND   POLAR 


Theorem  33. 

Two  tangents  are  drawn  to  a  circle  from  a  point  A  on 
the  polar  of  a  point  B ;  a  harmonic  pencil  is  formed  by 
the  two  tangents  from  A,  the  polar  of  B  and  the  line  ab. 


fig.  39. 

Let  AP,  AQ  be  the  tangents  from  A. 

Since   the  polar  of    B   passes   through  A,   ,' 
(i.e.    PQ)  passes  through   B. 

Let  the  polar  of  B  cut  PQ  at  C. 

Then  P,  C,  Q,  B  is  a  harmonic  range. 

.'.    the  pencil  AP,  AC,  AQ,  AB  is  harmonic. 

Ex.  277.     Prove  Ex.  219  by  means  of  Theorem  33. 


the  polar  of    A 


[Th.  31.] 


Ex.  278.  From  any  point  P  on  a  fixed  straight  line  XY  tangents 
I^Z,  PW  are  drawn  to  a  circle  ;  prove  that,  if  PT  is  such  that  the  pencil 
P{ZW,  YT}  is  harmonic,  PT  passes  through  a  fixed  point. 

[Prove  that  the  intersection  of  ZW,  PT  is  the  pole  of  XY.] 


Ex.  279.  Prove  that,  if  the  lines  PX,  PY,  QX,  QY  all  touch  a  circle, 
then  XY  passes  through  the  pole  of  PQ. 

[Draw  PZ  to  cut  XY  at  Z,  such  that  P{XY,  ZQ}=  -1;  and  consider 
the  pencil  Q{XY,  ZP}.] 


POLE    AND    POLAR  69 

An  interesting  case  of  pole  and  polar  is  that  in  which  the 
circle  has  an  infinite  radius. 


T  A 


fig.  40. 

Let  AB  be  a  diameter  of  a  circle,  T  any  point  on  it  and  let 
the  polar  of  T  cut  AB  at  N  ;  then  TN  is  divided  harmonically  at 
A  and  B. 

Now  suppose  that  A  and  T  remain  fixed  and  that  B  moves 
along  the  line  TA  further  and  further  from  B  ;  in  the  limit  when 
B  has  moved  to  an  infinite  distance,  TA  =  AN  (since  {TN,  AB}  =  —  1); 
and  the  circle  becomes  the  line  at  infinity  together  with  the  line 
through  A  at  right  angles  to  TN. 

Thus  the  polar  of  a  point  T  with  respect  to  a  line  (regarded 
as  part  of  a  circle  of  infinite  radius)  is  a  parallel  line  whose 
distance  from  T  is  double  the  distance  of  the  given  line  from  T. 

Ex.  280.  Into  what  do  the  following  properties  degenerate  in  the  case 
in  which  the  circle  has  an  infinite  radius:  (i)  Theorem  31,  (ii)  Ex.  262, 
(iii)  Ex.  272,  (iv)  Ex.  273  ? 

Exercises  on  Chapter  YII. 

Ex,  281.  Through  a  point  A  within  a  circle  are  drawn  two  chords 
PP',  QQ' ;  show  that  PQ,  P'Q'  subtend  equal  angles  at  B,  the  foot  of 
the  perpendicular  from  A  to  the  polar  of  A  with  respect  to  the  circle. 

Ex.  282.  TP,  TQ  are  two  tangents  to  a  circle  ;  prove  that  the  tangent 
to  the  circle  from  any  point  on  PQ  produced  is  divided  harmonically  by  TP 
and  TQ. 

Ex.  283.  The  tangents  at  two  points  P  and  Q  of  a  circle  intersect  at 
T  ;  HTK  is  drawn  parallel  to  the  tangent  at  a  point  R,  and  meets  PR  and 
QR  in  H  and  K  respectively ;  prove  that  HK  is  bisected  in  T. 


70  POLE   AND   POLAR 

Ex.  284.  From  a  point  O  a  line  is  drawn  cutting  a  circle  in  P  and  R 
and  the  polar  of  O  in  Q  ;  if  N  is  the  mid-point  of  PR  and  if  the  polar  of  O 
meets  the  circle  in  T  and  T',  show  that  the  circles  TQN,  T'QN  touch  OT, 
OT'  respectively. 

Ex.  285.  A  fixed  point  A  is  joined  to  any  point  P  on  a  circle,  AQ  is 
drawn  to  cut  the  tangent  at  P  in  Q  so  that  L  PAQ=:  z  APQ,  AQ  is  pro- 
duced to  R  and  QR  =  AQ ;  prove  that  R  lies  on  the  polar  of  A. 

Ex.  286.  From  a  point  O  are  drawn  two  straight  lines,  OT  to  touch  a 
given  circle  at  T  and  OC  to  pass  through  its  centre  C,  and  TN  is  drawn  to 
cut  OC  at  right  angles  in  N.  Show  that  the  circle  which  touches  00  at  O 
and  passes  through  T  cuts  the  given  circle  at  a  point  S  such  that  the  straight 
line  TS  produced  bisects  NO. 

Ex.  287.  AOB,  COD  are  chords  of  a  circle  intersecting  in  O.  The 
tangents  at  A  and  D  meet  in  P,  and  the  tangents  at  B  and  0  meet  in  Q. 
Show  that  P,  O,  Q  are  collinear. 

Ex.  288.  The  product  of  the  perpendiculars  on  any  two  tangents  to  a 
circle  from  any  point  on  its  circumference  is  equal  to  the  square  on  the 
perpendicular  from  the  point  to  the  chord  of  contact. 

Ex.  289.  I  is  the  centre  of  the  incircle  of  a  triangle  ABC;  lines  through  I 
perpendicular  to  I  A,  IB,  10  meet  the  tangent  at  P  to  the  incircle  in  D,  E,  F 
respectively.  Find  the  positions  of  the  poles  of  AD,  BE,  OF  with  respect 
to  the  incircle:  and  hence  (or  otherwise)  prove  that  these  three  lines  are 
concurrent. 

Ex.  290.  The  distances  of  two  points  from  the  centre  of  a  circle  are  in 
the  same  ratio  as  their  distances  each  from  the  polar  of  the  other  with 
respect  to  the  circle  (Salmon's  theorem). 

Ex.  291.  The  harmonic  mean  of  the  perpendiculars  from  any  point  O 
within  a  circle  to  the  tangents  drawn  from  any  point  on  the  polar  of  O  is 
constant. 


CHAPTER    VIII. 


SIMILITUDE. 

1.  In  elementary  geometry*  we  have  seen  that,  if  a  point 
O  is  joined  to  each  vertex  of  a  given  polygon,  and  if  each  of  the 
joins  is  divided  in  the  same  ratio,  these  points  of  division  are 
the  vertices  of  a  similar  polygon. 

Extending  this  principle,  we  see  that,  if  a  'point  O  is  joined  to 
a  'point  P,  and  OP  is  divided  in  a  fixed  ratio  at  Q,  as  P  describes 
a  given  figure  {consisting  of  any  number  of  lines  and  curves),  the 
point  Ql  will  describe  a  similar  figure. 

Ex.  292.  Draw  a  circle  of  radius  4  cm. ;  mark  a  point  O,  10  cm.  from 
its  centre ;  if  P  is  any  point  on  the  circle  plot  the  locus  of  the  mid-point 
of  OP. 

Ex.  293.     Prove  that  the  locus  is  a  circle  in  Ex,  292. 

Ex.  294.  P  is  a  variable  point  on  a  fixed  circle  whose  centre  is  O;  a 
point  Q  is  taken  on  the  tangent  at  P,  such  that  angle  POQ  is  constant; 
what  is  the  locus  of  Q? 

Ex.  295.  Draw  a  triangle  ABC  having  BC  =  8  cm.,  CA  =  6  cm., 
AB  =  7  cm. ;  mark  a  point  P  4  cm.  from  B  and  6  cm.  from  C.  The  triangle 
is  now  rotated  about  P  through  a  right  angle,  to  the  position  abc ;  explain 
how  you  determine  the  points  a,  b,  c  and  find  what  angle  ac  makes  with  AC. 

2.  If  a  figure  is  rotated  about  a  point  O  through  any  angle  a, 
the  angle  through  which  any  line  in  the  figure  has  been  rotated 
(i.e.  the  angle  between  the  new  position  and  the  old)  is  a. 

*  G-odfrey  and  Siddons'  Elementary  Geometry,  iv.  9. 


72  SIMILITUDE 

3.  Again  suppose  O  a  fixed  point  and  P  any  point  on  a  given 
figure^  and  Q  a  point  such  that  OQ  :  OP  =  k:  1,  and  L  POQ  =  a 

{k  and  a  being  constants);   as   P   describes   any  figure,  Q  will 
describe  a  similar  figure. 

For  suppose  Q'  a  point  in  OP  such  that  OQ!  :  OP  =  k  :  I,  Ql' 
will  describe  a  figure  similar  to  the  "  P"  figure;  and  if  we  now 
rotate  the  "  Q'"  figure  about  O  through  an  angle  a  it  will 
coin-cide  with  the  "Q"  figure. 

Ex.  296.  P  is  a  variable  point  on  a  fixed  circle,  O  any  point  inside  it ; 
PQ  is  drawn  at  right  angles  to  OP  and  OQ  makes  a  fixed  angle  (always 
taken  in  the  same  sense)  with  OP.     What  is  the  locus  of  Q? 

4.  If  ABC,  DEF  are  two  similar  triangles  with  their  corre- 
sponding sides  parallel,  then  AD,  BE,  OF  will  be  concurrent. 


For  if  AD  and  BE  cut  at  O,  OA  :  OD  ==  AB  :  DE;  and  if  AD  and 
OF  cut  at  O',  O'A  :  O'D  =  AC  :  DF  =  AB  :  DE  =  OA  :  OD  ;  .-.  O  and  O' 
coincide. 

Extending  this  we  see  that,  if  ABC D  ...  A'B'C'D'  ...  are  two 
similar  rectilinear  figures  with  their  corresponding  sides  parallel, 
AA',  BB',  CC',  DD',  ...  are  concurre7it ;  or  going  a  step  further  we 
see  that  the  same  is  true  even  when  the  figures  consist  of  curves  as 
well  as  straight  lines. 

When  two  similar  figures  are  so  placed  that  the  join  of  each 
pair  of  points  in  the  one  figure  is  parallel  to  the  join  of  the  cor- 
responding pair  of  points  in  the  other  figure,  the  two  figures  are 
said  to  be  similarly  situated  and  the  point  of  concurrence  of 


SIMILITUDE  73 

the  lines  joining  corresponding  points  is  called  the  centre  of 
similitude. 

In  the  case  of  triangles  we  have  seen  that  AD  is  divided 
(externally  or  internally)  in  the  ratio  of  AB  :  DE. 

So  in  the  general  case  the  centre  of  similitude  divides  the  joins 
oj  corresponding  points  in  the  ratio  of  the  linear  dimensions  of  the 
two  figures. 

Ex.  297.  Draw  a  careful  figure  of  two  similar  and  similarly  situated 
circles;  indicate  several  corresponding  points  and  draw  the  tangents  at  a 
pair  of  such  points. 

Ex.  298.  Draw  (or  plot)  an  accurate  parabola.  Draw  a  similar  and 
similarly  situated  curve,  (i)  when  the  centre  of  similitude  is  on  the  axis, 
(ii)  when  it  is  not  on  the  axis. 

Ex.  299.  If  any  line  through  the  centre  of  similitude  of  two 
curves  cuts  them  at  corresponding  points  P  and  P',  the  tangents  at 
P  and  P'  are  parallel. 

Or  in  other  words,  any  line  through  the  centre  of  similitude  of 
two  curves  cuts  them  at  the  same  angle  at  corresponding  points. 

[Use  the  method  of  limits.] 

Ex.  300.  If  O  is  a  centre  of  similitude  of  two  curves,  a  tangent 
firom  O  to  either  of  the  curves  touches  the  other  curve,  and  the  points 
of  contact  are  corresponding  points. 


fig.  43.  fig.  44. 

5.  In  the  case  of  two  circles  there  are  two  centres  of  similitude^ 
viz.  the  points  which  divide  the  line  joining  the  centres  externally 
and  internally  in  the  ratio  of  the  radii. 

In  fig.  44  the  constant  ratio  is  negative. 


74  SIMILITUDE 

Ex.  301.  If  a  circle  A  touches  two  circles  B,  C  at  points  P,  Q, 
prove  that  PQ  passes  through  a  centre  of  similitude  of  the  circles 
B,  C. 

Note  that  there  are  two  cases. 

Ex.  302.  Prove  that  the  common  tangents  to  two  circles  pass 
through   one  of  their  centres  of  similitude. 

Ex.  303.     What  is  the  centre  of  similitude  of  a  line  and  a  circle  ? 
Have  they  two  centres  of  similitude? 

Ex.  304.     Have  two  parallel  lines  a  centre  of  similitude? 

Ex.  305.     Have  two  intersecting  lines  a  centre  of  similitude? 


Exercises  on  Chapter  VIII. 

Ex.  306.  A  triangle  ABC  is  given  in  specie  (i.e.  its  angles  are  given) 
and  the  point  A  is  fixed  ;  prove  that  B  and  C  describe  similar  loci. 

Ex.  307.  Find  the  centres  of  similitude  of  the  circumcircle  and  nine- 
points  circle  of  a  triangle. 

OX 

Ex.  308.    O  is  a  fixed  point,  XOY  a  constant  angle,  p— r  a  constant  ratio. 

Find  the  locus  of  Y  when  that  of  X  is  (i)  a  straight  line,  (ii)  a  circle. 

Ex.  309.  Prove  that  the  line  joining  the  vertex  of  a  triangle  to  that 
point  of  the  inscribed  circle  which  is  furthest  from  the  base  passes  through 
the  point  of  contact  of  the  escribed  circle  with  the  base. 

Ex.  310.  A  triangle  ABC  is  inscribed  in  a  given  circle,  and  its  vertex 
A  is  fixed.  Show  that  the  locus  of  a  point  P  on  BC,  such  that  the  ratio  of 
AD 2  to  BD  .  DC  is  given,  is  a  circle  touching  the  given  circle  at  A. 

Ex.  311.  C  is  a  moving  point  on  a  circle  of  which  O  is  centre  and 
AB  is  a  fixed  diameter;  BC  is  produced  to  D  so  that  BC  =  CD.  Find  the 
locus  of  the  intersection  of  AC  and  CD. 

Ex.  312.  In  a  quadrilateral  ABCD,  the  points  A  and  B  are  fixed,  and 
the  lengths  BC,  CA  and  CD  are  given.  Find  the  locus  of  (1)  the  mid-point 
of  BD,  (2)  the  mid-point  of  the  line  joining  the  mid-points  of  the  diagonals. 

Ex.  313.  Through  a  point  O  draw  a  line  cutting  a  circle  in  P,  Q,  such 
that  the  chord  PQ  is  i  of  OQ. 


SIMILITUDE  75 

Ex.  314.  A  is  a  moving  point  on  a  fixed  diameter  BD  (produced)  of  a 
circle;  AC  is  a  tangent  from  A;  P  is  the  projection  of  the  centre  on  the 
bisector  of  the  angle  OAC.    Find  the  locus  of  P. 

Ex.  315.  Inscribe  in  an  equilateral  triangle  another  equilateral  triangle 
having  each  side  equal  to  a  given  straight  line. 

Ex.  316.  Describe  a  triangle  of  given  species  (given  angle)  so  that  one 
angular  point  may  be  at  a  given  point  and  the  others  on  given  straight 
lines. 

Ex.  317.  O  is  a  fixed  point,  and  a  straight  line  OPQ  revolving  round  O 
cuts  a  fixed  circle  in  P,  Q.  On  this  line  is  a  point  R  such  that  OP  .OR  =  k^. 
Find  the  locus  of  R. 


CHAPTER    IX. 

MISCELLANEOUS   PROPERTIES   OF   THE   CIRCLE. 

Section  I.     Orthogonal  Circles. 

Definition.  The  angles  at  which  two  curves  intersect 
are  the  angles  between  the  tangents  to  the  curves  at  their  point 
of  intersection. 

Ex.  318.  If  two  circles  intersect  at  P  and  Q,  the  angles  at  whicli 
they  intersect  at  P  are  equal  to  the  angles  at  which  they  intersect 
at  Q. 

Definition.  When  two  circles  intersect  at  right  angles,  they 
are  said  to  intersect  orthogonally  and  are  called  orthogonal 
circles. 

Theorem  34. 

If  two  circles  are  orthogonal,  a  tangent  to  either  at 
their  point  of  intersection  passes  through  the  centre  of 
the  other. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 

Ex.  310.     Prove  Theorem  34. 

Ex.  320.  Two  circles  A  and  B  are  orthogonal  if  the  tangent  to  A  from 
the  centre  of  B  is  equal  to  the  radius  of  B. 


ORTHOGONAL   CIRCLES  77 

Ex.  321.     Through  two  given  points  on  a  circle  draw  a  circle  to  cut  the 
given  circle  orthogonally. 
Is  this  always  possible  ? 

Ex.  322.     Through  a  given  point  on  a  circle  draw  a  circle  of  given 
radius  to  cut  the  given  circle  orthogonally. 
Is  this  always  possible? 

Ex.  323.  The  tangents  drawn  from  a  point  P  to  two  circles  are  equal; 
prove  that  a  circle  can  be  described  with  P  as  centre  to  cut  both  circles 
orthogonally. 

Ex.  324.  The  pole  of  the  common  chord  of  two  orthogonal  circles  with 
respect  to  one  of  the  circles  is  the  centre  of  the  other. 


Theorem  35. 

The  sum  of  the  squares  on  the  radii  of  two  orthogonal 
circles  is  equal  to  the  square  on  the  distance  between 
their  centres. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 

Ex.  325.     Prove  Theorem  35. 

Ex.  326.     State  and  prove  the  converse  of  Theorem  35. 

Ex.  327.  If  two  circles  be  described  upon  the  straight  lines  joining  the 
two  pairs  of  conjugate  points  of  a  harmonic  range  as  diameters,  the  circles 
cut  orthogonally. 

Theorem  36. 

Any  diameter  of  a  circle  which  cuts  an  orthogonal 
circle  is  divided  harmonically  by  the  orthogonal  circle. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 
Ex.  328.     Prove  Theorem  36. 

Ex.  329.  If  P,  Q  divide  a  diameter  of  a  given  circle  harinonicaUy, 
any  circle  through  PQ  cuts  the  given  circle  orthogonaUy. 

Ex.  330.  A  variable  circle  passes  through  a  fixed  point  and  cuts  a  given 
circle  orthogonally ;  prove  that  the  variable  circle  passes  through  another 
fixed  point. 


78  THE   CIRCLE  OF   APOLLONIUS 

Ex.  331.    Describe  a  circle  to  cut  a  given  circle  orthogonally  and  pass 
through  two  given  points. 
Is  this  always  possible  ? 

Ex.  332.  If  a  pair  of  orthogonal  circles  intersect  at  P  and  Q,  and  if  the 
line  APB  cuts  the  circles  at  A  and  B,  then  AB  subtends  a  right  angle  at  Q. 

Ex.  333.  Circles  are  orthogonal  if  the  angles  in  the  major  segments  on 
opposite  sides  of  the  chord  of  intersection  are  complementary. 

Ex.  334.  The  locus  of  the  points  of  intersection  of  the  straight  lines 
joining  two  fixed  points  on  a  circle  to  the  extremities  of  a  variable  diameter 
is  the  circle  through  the  fixed  points  orthogonal  to  the  given  circle. 


Section  II.     The  Circle  of  Apollonius*. 

Theorem  37. 

If  a  point  P  moves  so  that  the  ratio  of  its  distances 
from  two  fixed  points  Q,  R  is  constant,  the  locus  of  P  is  a 
circle. 


fig.  45. 

For  any  position  of  P  draw  PX,  PY,  the  bisectors  of  the  angle 
QPR,  to  cut  QR  in  X,  Y  respectively. 

Since  PX  bisects  _  QPR, 

.*.  QX  :  XR  -  QP  :  PR 

=  the  given  ratio. 

.*.  X  is  a  fixed  point. 

Similarly  Y  is  a  fixed  point. 

*  See  note  on  p.  20. 


THE  CIRCLE  OF   APOLLONIUS  T9 

Again,  since  PX,  PY  are  the  bisectors  of  l  QPR, 
.'.   z.  XPY  is  a  right  angle. 
.*.    the  locus  of  P  is  the  circle  on  XY  as  diameter. 

Ex.  335.  Construct  a  triangle  having  given  its  base,  the  ratio  of  its 
other  two  sides  and  its  area. 

Ex.  336.  Construct  a  triangle  having  given  one  side,  the  angle  opposite 
to  that  side  and  the  ratio  of  the  other  two  sides. 

Ex.  337.  Find  a  point  such  that  its  distances  from  three  given  points 
are  in  given  ratios. 

How  many  solutions  are  there  ? 

Ex.  338.     Gi  jn  the  ratio  of  <^^e  two  sides  of  a  triangle,  the  middle 

point  of  tht  /  'r-d  ride.  "^  ich  this  side  is  met  by  the  bisector 

of  the  angle  opposit  'ion  of  this  bisector,  construct  the 
triangle. 

Ex.  339.    In  fig,  ^5     rove  thi;  xn^„nt  at  P  passes  through  the 

circu  '     itre  of  the  triangle  PQR. 

Ex.  34 O.  The  internal  and  external  bisectors  of  the  angles  of  a  triangle 
>.re  rawn,  and  on  the  lengths  they  intercept  on  the  opposite  sides  circles  are 
dt,  cri  ?d  having  these  intercepts  as  diameters  :  prove  that  these  circles  will 
all  pass  through  two  points. 


80 


PTOLEMY  S   THEOREM 


Section  III.     Ptolemy's"^  Theorem. 

Theorem  38. 

The  sum  of  the  rectangles  contained  by  opposite  sides 
of  a  cyclic  quadrilateral  is  equal  to  the  rectangle  con- 
tained by  its  diagonals. 


fig.  46. 

Let  PQRS  be  the  quadrilateral. 

Make  z_  SPT  =  ^  RPQ,  and  let  PT  cut  SQ  at  T. 

Now  As  SPT,  RPQ  are  equiangular 

(  L  SPT  =  L  RPQ,    L  PST  =  L  PRQ), 
.'.    PS  :  PR  =  ST  :  RQ, 
.".    PS  .  RQ=  PR  .  ST. 
Again  As  TPQ,  SPR  are  equiangular 

(  L  TPQ=  z_  SPR,    L  PQT  =  L  PRS), 

.-.    PQ  :  PR  =  TQ  :  SR, 

.-.    PQ.SR^PR.TQ, 

.'.    PS.  RQ+  PQ.  SR  =:  PR  .  ST  +  PR.  TQ 

-  PR  .  SQ. 

Ex.  341.  What  does  Ptolemy's  theorem  become  in  the  special  case  in 
which  two  vertices  of  the  quadrilateral  coincide  ? 

Ex.  342.  What  does  Ptolemy's  theorem  become  in  the  special  case  in 
which  the  circle  becomes  a  straight  line  ? 

Prove  the  theorem  independently. 

Ex.  343.  ABC  is  an  equilateral  triangle  inscribed  in  a  circle  ;  P  is  any 
point  on  the  minor  arc  BC.     Prove  that  PA=  PB  +  PC. 

*  Ptolemy  was  a  great  Greek  astronomer,  and  one  of  the  earliest  writers 
on  trigonometry  (87 — 165  a.d.). 


ptolemy's  theorem  81 

Theorem  39. 

The  rectangle  contained  by  the  diagonals  of  a  quadri- 
lateral is  less  than  the  sum  of  the  rectangles  contained 
by  its  opposite  sides  unless  the  quadrilateral  is  cyclic,  in 
which  case  it  is  equal  to  that  sum. 


S  R 

fig.  47. 

Let  PQRS  be  the  quadrilateral. 
Make  l  SPT  =  l  RPQ  and   l  PST  =  L  PRQ. 
Now  As  SPT,  RPQ  are  equiangular  by  construction, 
.'.    PS  :  PR  =  ST  :  RQ, 
.'.    PS.  RQ==PR.  ST. 
Also   PT  :  PQ  ==  PS  :  PR, 
.•.    PT  :  PS  =  PQ  :  PR 
and   :!  TPQ  =  z.  SPR, 
.'.   As  TPQ,  SPR  are  equiangular, 
.•.    PQ  :  PR==TQ  :  SR, 
.*.    PQ.  SR-  PR  .  TQ, 
.-.    PR  .  ST  +  PR  .  TQ  =  PS  .  RQ  +  PQ  .  SR. 
But  SQ  <  ST  +  TQ  unless  STQ  is  a  straight  line. 
.*.    PR  .  SQ  <  PS  .  RQ  +  PQ  .  SR  unless  STQ  is  a  straight  line. 
If  STQ  is  a  straight  line, 

z.  QSP=  z.  QRP  by  construction. 
.'.   in  that  case  P,  Q,  R,  S  are  coney clic. 

Note  that  this  theorem  includes  the  converse  of  Ptolemy's  theorem. 

G.  s.  M.  G.  6 


82  Ptolemy's  theorem 

Ex.  344.  If  ABC  is  an  equilateral  triangle,  find  the  locus  of  a  point 
which  moves  so  that  the  sum  of  its  distances  from  B  and  C  is  equal  to  its 
distance  from  A. 

Several  theorems  in  trigonometry  may  be  proved  by  means 
of  Ptolemy's  theorem,  but  of  course  the  proofs  do  not  apply  to 
angles  greater  than  two  right  angles. 

As  an  example,  we  will  prove  that 

sin  (a  +  /5)  =  sin  a  cos  p  +  cos  a  sin  y8. 

In  fig.  48,  let  PR  be  a  diameter  and  z.  SPR  =  a,  z.  RPQ  =  y8,  and 
let  p  be  the  radius  of  the  circle. 


Then  PQ  ==  2p  cos  ^,  RQ  =  2p  sin  ^,   SR  =  2p  sin  a,   PS  =  2p  cos  a, 
PR  -  2p.     Also  by  Th.  5  SQ  -  2p  sin  (a  +  (S). 

By  Ptolemy's  theorem 

PR.  SQ-  PS  .  RQ  +  PQ  .  SR, 

.'.    2p  .  2p  sin  (a  +  ^)  =  2p  cos  a  .  2/3  sin  ^  +  2p  cos  /?  .  2p  sin  a, 
.'.    sin  (a+j8)  =  cos  a  sin  /8  +  cos  /?  sin  a. 

Ex.  345.     Prove  the  formula  for  cos(a  +  /3)  by  taking  PQ  a  diameter, 
zQPR^a,  and  z  PQS  =  /3. 

Ex.  346.    Prove  the  formulae  for  sin  (a  -  /3)  and  cos  (a  -  /3). 


CONTACT   PROBLEMS  83 


Section  IV.     Contact  Problems. 

Consider  the  problem  of  describing  a  circle  to  touch  three 
given  circles.  As  particular  cases  any  of  the  three  circles  may 
become  a  line  or  point. 

For  the  sake  of  clearness  it  will  be  convenient  to  adopt  abbreviations  in 
Exs.  347—357,  e.g.  "Describe  a  circle  having  given  P2L1C0"  will  be  used 
as  an  abbreviation  for  "Describe  a  circle  to  pass  through  two  given  points 
and  touch  a  given  line." 

Ex.  347.    Show  that  ten  different  cases  may  arise  out  of  this. 

Ex.  348.  State  two  cases  which  are  already  familiar.  How 
many  solutions  are  there  in  each  case? 

Ex.  349.     Describe  a  circle  having  given  PaLjCo. 
How  many  solutions  are  there  ? 

[Produce  the  line  joining  the  two  points  to  cut  the  given  line  ;  where  will 
the  point  of  contact  be  ?] 

Ex.  350.     Describe  a  circle  having  given  PgLoCi. 

How  many  solutions  are  there  ? 

[Draw  any  circle  through  the  two  points  to  cut  the  given  circle;  let 
their  radical  axis  meet  the  line  joining  the  two  points  in  T  ;  draw  tangents 
from  T.] 

Ex.  351.     Describe  a  circle  having  given  P1L2C0. 
How  many  solutions  are  there  1 
[Describe  any  circle  touching  the  two  lines  and  magnify  it.] 

Ex.  352.  If  a  circle  touches  a  line  and  a  circle,  the  line  joining  the 
points  of  contact  passes  through  one  end  of  the  diameter  at  right  angles  to 
the  given  line. 

Note  that  the  ends  of  the  diameter  are  the  centres  of  similitude  of  the 
line  and  circle. 

Ex.  353.     Describe  a  circle  having  given  PiLiCi. 

How  many  solutions  are  there  1 

[See  Ex.  352  ;  let  A,  B  be  the  ends  of  the  diameter,  and  let  AB  cut  the 
line  in  C  ;  let  M,  N  be  the  points  of  contact,  P  the  given  point,  and  let  AP 
cut  the  required  circle  in  P' ;  then  AB.AC=:AM.AN=AP.AP'.] 

6—2 


84  MISCELLANEOUS   PROPERTIES   OF  THE   CIRCLE 

Ex.  354.     Describe  a  circle  having  given  PiLoCg. 
How  many  solutions  are  there"? 
[Take  a  centre  of  similitude  of  the  two  circles,  and  see  note  to  Ex.  353.] 

Ex.  355.     Describe  a  circle  having  given  PoLgCi. 

How  many  solutions  are  there  ? 

[Move  the  lines  parallel  to  themselves  through  a  distance  equal  to  the 
radius  of  the  circle;  describe  a  circle  to  touch  these  lines  and  pass  through 
the  centre  of  the  given  circle ;  this  circle  will  be  concentric  with  the  required 
circle. 

This  process  is  called  thie  metliod  of  parallel  translation.] 

Ex.  356.     Describe  a  circle  having  given  PoLjCa. 
How  many  solutions  are  there  ? 
[Reduce  one  of  the  circles  to  a  point  by  the  method  of  parallel  translation.] 

Ex.  357.     Describe  a  circle  having  given  P0L0C3. 
[Use  the  method  of  parallel  translation.] 


Exercises  on  Chapter  IX. 

Ex.  358.  Prove  that  the  locus  of  the  centres  of  circles  passing  through 
a  given  point  and  cutting  a  given  circle  orthogonally  is  a  straight  line. 

Ex.  359.  Show  that,  if  AB  is  a  diameter  of  a  circle  which  cuts  two  given 
circles  orthogonally,  the  polars  of  A  with  respect  to  the  two  circles  intersect 
in  B. 

Ex.  360.  O  is  a  common  point  of  two  orthogonal  circles,  A,  A'  are  the 
points  of  contact  of  one  common  tangent,  B,  B'  of  the  other. 

Show  that  one  of  the  angles  AOA',  BOB'  is  half  a  right  angle  and  that 
their  sum  is  two  right  angles. 

Ex.  361.  Two  fixed  circles  intersect  in  A,  B  ;  P  is  a  variable  point  on 
one  of  them;  PA  meets  the  other  circle  in  X  and  PB  meets  it  in  Y.  Prove 
that  BX  and  AY  intersect  on  a  fixed  circle. 

Ex.  362.  Find  the  locus  of  the  points  at  which  two  given  circles  sub- 
tend the  same  angle. 


MISCELLANEOUS   PROPERTIES   OF   THE   CIRCLE  85 

Ex.  363.  If  A,  B  be  two  fixed  points  in  a  fixed  plane,  and  P  a  point 
which  moves  in  the  plane  so  that  AP  — w.  BP,  where  m>l,  show  that  P 

describes  a  circle  whose  radius  is      '     ,  . 

m-^-  1 

Show  also  that  if  two  tangents  to  the  circle  be  drawn  from  A,  their 

chord  of  contact  passes  through  B. 

Ex.  364.  Four  points  A,  B,  A',  B'  are  given  in  a  plane;  prove  that  there 
are  always  two  positions  of  a  point  C  in  the  plane  such  that  the  triangles 
CAB,  CA'B'  are  similar,  the  equal  angles  being  denoted  by  corresponding 
letters. 

Ex.  365.  Three  chords  AA',  BB',  CC  of  a  circle  are  concurrent.  Show 
that  the  product  of  the  lengths  of  the  chords  AB',  BC,  CA'  is  equal  to  that 
of  the  chords  BA',  CB',  AC. 

Ex.  366.  Show  that  a  line  cannot  be  divided  harmonically  by  two 
circles  which  cut  orthogonally,  unless  it  passes  through  one  or  other  of 
the  centres. 

Ex.  367.  The  bisectors  of  the  angles  A,  B,  C  of  a  triangle  cut  the 
opposite  sides  in  Xj,  X^;  Yj,  Y.^ ;  Zj,  Z.^  respectively. 

Show  that  the  circles  on  the  lines  X^Xa,  Y^Yg,  Z^Zg  as  diameters  have 
a  common  chord. 

Ex,  368.  Construct  a  triangle,  having  given  the  length  of  the  internal 
bisector  of  one  angle,  the  ratio  of  the  side  opposite  that  angle  to  the  sum  of 
the  other  sides,  and  the  difference  of  the  other  angles. 

Ex.  369.  It  is  required  to  draw  a  circle  to  touch  two  given  straight  lines 
and  a  given  circle.  Prove  that  the  eight  possible  points  of  contact  with  the 
circle  may  be  found  thus : — 

Draw  tangents  to  the  circle  parallel  to  the  two  lines  and  join  the  vertices 
of  the  rhombus  so  formed  to  the  point  of  intersection  of  the  two  lines. 

These  lines  cut  the  circle  in  the  required  points. 

Ex.  370.     Describe  a  circle : 

(i)    to  touch  a  given  line  and  pass  through  two  given  points, 

(ii)   to  pass  through  two  given  points  and  cut  off  from  a  given  line 

a  chord  of  given  length, 
(iii)  to  pass  through  two  given  points,  so  that  the  tangent  drawn  to  it 
from  another  given  point  may  be  of  given  length. 

Ex.  371.  Two  circles,  centres  A  and  B,  intersect  at  right  angles  at  Q 
and  Q'.  A  line  PQR  cuts  the  circles  again  at  P  and  R.  Show  that  AB  sub- 
tends a  right  angle  at  the  middle  point  of  PR. 


86  MISCELLANEOUS   PROPERTIES   OF  THE    CIRCLE 

Ex.  372.  From  a  given  point  O,  straight  lines  OA,  OB,  OC  are  drawn 
cutting  a  fixed  straight  line  in  A,  B,  C.  A  circle  OBD  is  described  cutting 
the  circle  OAC  orthogonally,  D  being  a  point  on  the  straight  line  ABC. 
Prove  that  either  the  angles  AOBjand  COD  are  complementary,  or  one  of 
these  angles  and  the  supplement  of  the  other  are  complementary. 

Ex.  373.  On  a  given  chord  AB  of  a  circle,  a  fixed  point  C  is  taken,  and 
another  chord  EF  is  drawn  so  that  the  lines  AF,  BE,  and  the  line  joining  C 
to  the  middle  point  of  EF  meet  in  a  point  O  ;  show  that  the  locus  of  O  is  a 
circle. 

Ex.  374.  A  straight  line  is  drawn  cutting  the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB  of  the 
triangle  ABC  in  the  points  D,  E,  F  respectively,  so  that  the  ratio  FD  to  DE 
is  constant;  show  that  the  citcles  FBD,  CDE  pass  through  a  fixed  point. 

Ex.  375.  If  S,  S'  are  the  centres  of  similitude  of  two  circles,  prove  that 
the  circles  subtend  equal  angles  at  any  point  on  the  circle  whose  diameter  is 
SS'. 

Ex.  376.  Construct  a  quadrilateral  given  the  two  diagonals,  the  angle 
at  which  they  cut,  and  a  pair  of  opposite  angles. 

Ex.  377.  A  variable  circle  passes  through  a  fixed  point  C  and  is  such 
that  the  polar  of  a  given  point  A  with  respect  to  it  passes  through  a  fixed 
point  B  ;  show  that  the  locus  of  the  centre  of  the  circle  is  a  straight  line 
perpendicular  to  that  joining  C  to  the  middle  point  of  AB. 

Ex.  378.  If  two  sides  of  a  triangle  of  given  shape  and  size  always  pass 
through  two  fixed  points,  the  third  side  always  touches  a  fixed  circle. 

[The  centre  of  this  circle  lies  on  the  locus  of  the  vertex  of  the  triangle, 
and  its  radius  is  equal  to  an  altitude  of  the  triangle.] 

Ex.  379.  If  two  sides  of  a  triangle  of  given  shape  and  size  slide  along 
two  fixed  circles,  the  envelope  of  the  third  side  is  a  circle.  [Bobillier's 
Theorem.] 


CHAPTEH    X. 


THE   RADICAL   AXIS;    COAXAL   CIRCLES. 

Ex.  380.  Draw  a  pair  of  circles  intersecting  at  points  P  and  Q ;  from 
any  point  on  PQ  produced  draw  tangents  to-  the  circles ;  prove  that  these 
tangents  are  of  equal  length. 

Definition.  The  locus  of  the  points  from  which  tangents 
drawn  to  two  circles  are  equal  is  called  the  radical  axis  of  the 
two  circles. 

In  Ex.  380,  we  have  seen  that  in  the  case  of  two  intersecting  circles  any 
point  on  their  common  chord  produced  is  on  their  radical  axis.  This  is  a 
particular  case  of  the  following  theorem. 


Theorem  40. 
The  radical  axis  of  two  circles  is  a  straight  line. 


fig.  49. 


88 


THE  RADICAL  AXIS 


fig.  50. 


fig.  51. 


[See  also  Jig.  49  on  page  87.] 


A,  B  are  the  centres  of  the  two  circles. 
Let  P  be  any  point  on  their  radical  axis. 
Draw  PQ,  PR  tangents  to  the  circles,  and  draw  PN  ±  to  AB. 
Since  P  is  on  the  radical  axis 
PQ2  =  pr2^ 
.-.    AP2  -  AQ2  =  BP2  -  BR2, 


.'.    PN^  +  AN^- AQ^- PN^  +  BN^- BR^ 
.-.    AN^  -  BN^  =  AQ2  -  BR2. 
.*.    having  regard  to  sense 

(AN  +  NB)  (AN  -  NB)  =  AQ^  -  BR^, 

.-.    AB(AN-  NB)=AQ2_  br2, 

.'.   AN  —  NB  is  independent  of  the  position  of  P, 

.'.    N  is  a  fixed  point. 

But  PN  is  ±  to  AB. 

.*.   the  locus  of  P  is  a  fixed  straight  line  J_  to  AB  cutting  AB 

at  a  point  N,  such  that  AN^  -  BN^  =  AQ^  _  brI 

If  we  forget  this  last  relation,  it  is  at  once  recovered  from  the  fact  that 
the  tangents  from  N  are  equal. 

Note  that  in  the  case  of  intersecting  circles  the  common  chord  is  not, 
according  to  the  above  definition,  part  of  the  radical  axis.  The  following 
exercise  suggests  a  modification  of  the  definition  which  would  enable  us  to 
remove  this  limitation,  and  regard  the  whole  line  as  the  radical  axis. 


THE   RADICAL   AXIS  89 

Ex.  381.  Prove  that  if  from  P,  any  point  on  the  radical  axis  of  two 
circles,  lines  are  drawn  cutting  the  one  circle  in  W,  X  and  the  other  in 
Y,  Z,  then  PW.PX  =  PY.PZ.  Take  care  that  your  proof  applies  to  the 
common  chord  of  two  intersecting  circles. 

Ex.  382.  In  the  case  of  each  of  the  following  pairs  of  circles,  find  the 
ratio  in  which  their  radical  axis  cuts  the  line  of  centres.  Make  rough 
sketches  of  the  figures.  (R,  r  are  the  radii  of  the  circles,  and  d  the  distance 
between  their  centres.) 


(i) 

R  =  5, 

r  =  3,  d  =  lQ 

(ii) 

R  =  5, 

r  =  3,  d  =  8; 

(iii) 

R=:5, 

T  =  3,    d  =  &'. 

(iv) 

R  =  5, 

r=3,  d=.2'. 

(V) 

R  =  5, 

r=3,  d  =  l; 

(vi) 

R  =  5, 

r=3,  d  =  Q', 

(vii) 

R  =  5, 

r  =  0,  d  =  l; 

(viii) 

R  =  5, 

r=0,  d  =  3; 

(ix) 

R  =  5, 

r=0,  d  =  Q; 

(x) 

R=.0, 

r  =  0,  d  =  b. 

Ex.  383.  What  is  the  radical  axis  of  two  circles,  one  of  which  has  an 
infinite  radius  (i)  when  they  cut  one  another,  (ii)  when  they  do  not  cut  ? 

Ex.  384.  What  is  the  radical  axis  of  two  circles  which  touch  one 
another  ? 

Ex.  385.     The  radical  axis  of  two  circles  bisects  their  common  tangent. 

Ex.  386.  Suggest  a  construction  for  the  radical  axis  of  two  non- 
intersecting  circles.     (See  Ex.  385.) 

In  what  case  does  the  construction  fail  ? 

Ex.  387.  In  a  triangle  ABC,  the  radical  axis  of  its  in-circle  and  the 
ex-circle  opposite  A  bisects  BC  and  cuts  AB  and  AC  at  points  whose 
distances  from  A  are  each  equal  to  \(h  +  c). 

Ex.  388.  If  the  radical  axis  of  the  ex-circles  opposite  A  and  B  cut 
AB,  AC  in  X,  Y  respectively,  find  the  distances  AX,  AY. 

Ex.  389.  Three  circles  pass  through  the  same  two  points.  Prove  that, 
if  the  common  tangent  of  any  two  of  them  is  cut  by  the  third  circle,  it 
is  divided  harmonically. 

Ex.  390.  Prove  the  validity  of  the  following  construction  for  the 
radical  axis  of  two  circles.  Draw  any  circle  to  cut  the  one  circle 
in  Q,  Q!  and  the  other  in  R,  R';  produce  QQ'  and  RR'  to  cut  at  P; 
draw  PN   i.  to  the  line  of  centres.     Then  PN  is  the  radical  axis. 


90  THE    RADICAL   AXIS 

Ex.  391.     What  is  the  radical  axis  of : 

(i)  a  point-circle  and  a  circle, 

(ii)  two  point-circles, 

(iii)  a  circle  and  a  line  (a  circle  of  infinite  radius), 

(iv)  a  point- circle  and  a  line, 

(v)  two  concentric  circles, 

(vi)  two  parallel  lines, 

(vii)  two  intersecting  lines  ? 

Ex.  392.  Give  a  construction  for  the  radical  axis  of  a  circle  and  a  point 
analogous  to  the  construction  of  Ex.  390. 

Does  your  construction  hold  if  the  point  is  inside  the  circle  ? 

Ex.  393.  If  from  any  point  P  tangents  are  drawn  to  two  circles,  the 
difference  of  their  squares  is  equal  to  twice  the  rectangle  contained  by 
the  distance  between  the  centres  and  the  perpendicular  from  P  on  the 
radical  axis  of  the  circles. 

[Join  P  to  the  centres  of  the  circles,  and  from  P  draw  a  perpendicular  to 
the  line  of  centres.] 


Theorem  41. 

The  three  radical  axes  of  three  circles  taken  in  pairs 
are  concurrent. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 

Ex.  394.     Prove  Theorem  41. 

[Consider  the  tangents  from  the  point  where  two  of  the  radical  axes 
intersect.] 

Definition.  The  point  of  concurrence  of  the  three  radical 
axes  of  a  system  of  three  circles  is  called  the  radical  centre  of 
the  three  circles. 

Ex.  395.  If  each  of  three  circles  touches  the  other  two,  the  three 
common  tangents  at  their  points  of  contact  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  396.     Circles  are  described  with  the  sides  of   a  triangle  ABC  as 
diameters,  where  is  their  radical  centre? 
[What  are  their  radical  axes  ?] 

Ex.  397.     Where  is  the  radical  centre  of  three  point-circles  ? 


COAXAL   CIRCLES  91 

Ex.  398.     If  the  centres  of  three  circles  are  coUinear,  where  is  their 
radical  centre? 

Ex.  399.    Where  is  the  radical  centre  of  three  circles,  two  of  which  are 
concentric  ? 


Coaxal  Circles. 

Ex.  400.  Draw  a  circle  A  and  a  circle  B  to  touch  it ;  what  is  their 
radical  axis?  Find  another  circle  C  such  that  A  and  C  have  the  same 
radical  axis  as  A  and  B. 

Ex.  401.  Draw  two  intersecting  circles  A  and  B.  What  is  their  radical 
axis  ?  Draw  another  circle  C  such  that  A  and  C  have  the  same  radical  axis 
as  A  and  B.     What  is  the  radical  axis  of  B  and  C  ? 

Ex.  402.  Draw  a  circle  with  centre  A  and  a  line  PN  outside  it;  draw 
AN  1  to  PN  ;  from  P  draw  PT  a  tangent  to  the  circle;  from  P  draw  a  line 
PT'=:PT,  draw  a  circle  with  its  centre  on  AN  (or  AN  produced)  to  touch 
PT'  at  T'.     What  is  the  radical  axis  of  the  two  circles  ? 

Definition.  If  a  system  of  circles  is  such  that  every  pair  has 
the  same  radical  axis,  the  circles  are  said  to  be  coaxal. 

It  is  obvious  that  coaxal  circles  have  all  their  centres  on  a 
straight  line,  which  is  perpendicular  to  the  common  radical  axis. 


Q 


FTTb 


fig.  52. 

In  Theorem  40  it  was  proved  that  if  A,  B  are  the  centres 
of  two  circles  whose  radii  are  AQ,  BR  and  N  the  point  at  which 
their  radical  axis  cuts  AB,  then 

AN2-AQ2  =  BN^-  BR2. 
By  reversing  the  steps  of  that  theorem  we  could  prove  that, 
if  the  given  relation  is  true  and  if  tangents  are  drawn  to  the 
circles  from  any  point  P  on  the  perpendicular  to  AB  through  N, 
these  tangents  must  be  equal ;  in  fact,  that  if  the  relation  holds 
PN  is  the  radical  axis  of  the  two  circles. 


92 


COAXAL    CIRCLES 


Now  suppose  that  the  one  circle  (centre  A)  and  the  radical 
axis  are  given ;  by  taking  different  positions  for  B  on  the  line  AN 
(produced  both  ways)  and  choosing  in  each  instance  the  radius 
given  by  the  above  relation,  we  get  an  infinite  number  of  circles? 
the  tangents  to  which  from  any  point  P  on  PN  are  equal  to  one 
another. 

We  therefore  get  a  system  of  coaxal  circles. 

Intersecting  coaxal  circles.  If  any  circle  of  a  coaxal 
system  cuts  the  radical  axis  at  C  and  D  say,  all  the  circles  must 
pass  through  C  and  D,  for  the  tangent  to  the  one  circle  from  C 
(or  D)  is  of  zero  length,  and  therefore  the  tangent  from  C  (or  D) 
to  each  circle  of  the  system  must  be  of  zero  length. 

In  the  same  way,  if  any  two  circles  of  the  system  intersect 
at  C  and  D,  all  the  circles  must  pass  through  C  and  D,  and  CD  is 
their  common  radical  axis. 

This  suggests  an  easy  construction  for  a  system  of  intersecting 
coaxal  circles. 


fig.  53. 


COAXAL   CIRCLES  93 

Non-intersecting  coaxal  circles.  We  will  now  consider 
a  construction  for  a  system  of  coaxal  circles  for  the  case  in 
which  no  circle  of  the  system  cuts  the  radical  axis  (and  no  two 
circles  of  the  system  cut  one  another). 

[See  Jig.  55  on  page  94.] 


fig.  54. 

Suppose  we  have  the  radical  axis  and  one  circle  of  the 
system. 

From  N  (which  must  be  outside  all  the  circles)  draw  a 
tangent  NQ  to  the  circle. 

With  centre  N  and  radius  NQ  describe  a  circle. 

Draw  BR  a  tangent  to  this  circle  from  any  suitable  point 
in  AN  (or  that  line  produced).  Then  the  circle  with  B  as  centre 
and  BR  as  radius  will  be  a  circle  of  the  system. 

For  AN^-AQ^:^  NQ2:=:NR2=BN2-BR2. 

It  should  be  noticed  that  instead  of  taking  N  as  centre  we  might  take 
any  point  on  the  radical  axis.  This  method  would  then  apply  to  inter- 
secting circles  as  well  as  non-intersecting. 

Ex.  403.  Draw  a  system  of  coaxal  circles,  one  circle  of  the  system 
having  its  centre  4  cm.  from  the  radical  axis  and  having  a  radius  of  3  cm. 

It  is  worthy  of  special  notice  that  in  a  system  of  coaxal 
circles  one  member  of  the  system  consists  of  the  radical  axis  and 
the  line  at  infinity. 

Ex.  404.  In  fig.  54  what  position  of  R  will  give  the  radical  axis  as  a 
member  of  the  system  ? 


94 


COAXAL   CIRCLES 


fig.  55. 


Ex.  405.  From  what  points  of  the  line  AB  in  fig.  54  is  it  impossible 
to  draw  tangents  to  the  construction  circle  ? 

Take  a  point  B'  between  L  and  N  ;  according  to  the  formula,  what  would 
be  the  square  on  the  radius  of  the  circle  of  the  system  with  centre  B'  ?  Is 
this  positive  or  negative  ? 

Ex.  406.  What  is  the  radius  of  the  circle  of  the  system  whose  centre 
is  at  L,  where  the  construction  circle  cuts  AN  ? 

Limiting  Points.  It  is  obvious  from  the  method  of  con- 
structing non-intersecting  coaxal  circles  (and  also  from  the 
relation  AN^- AQ^^^  BN^- BR^)  that  B  cannot  be  within  the 
construction  circle,  but  may  be  anywhere  else  along  the  line 
through  A  and  N. 

The  circles  of  the  system  whose  centres  are  at  the  points  L 
and  L'  where  the  construction  circle  cuts  the  line  AN  have  zero 


COAXAL    CIRCLES  95 

radius,  i.e.  are  point  circles.      L  and  L'  are  called  the  limiting 
points  of  the  system. 

Definition.  The  limiting  points  of  a  system  of  coaxal  circles 
are  the  point  circles  of  the  system. 

A  system  of  intersecting  coaxal  circles  has  no  real  limiting 
points ;  for  any  point  in  the  line  of  centres  may  be  taken  as  the 
centre  of  a  circle  of  the  system. 

Or,  looking  at  the  question  from  the  point  of  view  of  the 
definition,  in  the  case  of  intersecting  circles  there  are  no  real 
point  circles  of  the  system,  for  BN^  —  BR^^AN^-AQ^  which  is 
BR^  cannot  be  zero. 

Ex.  407.  P  is  any  point  on  the  radical  axis  of  a  coaxal  system  of 
circles ;  with  P  as  centre  a  circle  is  described  to  cut  one  of  the  circles  ortho- 
gonally ;  what  is  its  radius  ?  Prove  that  this  circle  cuts  all  the  circles  of  the 
system  orthogonally. 

Ex.  408.  In  Ex.  407  suppose  the  system  to  be  of  the  non -intersecting 
type ;  prove  that  the  orthogonal  circle  passes  through  two  points  which 
are  the  same  whatever  position  on  the  radical  axis  is  chosen  for  P. 

Ex.  409.  In  Ex.  407  suppose  the  system  to  be  of  the  non-intersecting 
type ;  prove  that  an  infinite  number  of  circles  can  be  drawn  to  cut  all  the 
circles  orthogonally,  and  prove  that  these  cutting  circles  are  themselves 
coaxal. 


Theorem  42. 

With  every  system  of  coaxal  circles  there  is  asso- 
ciated another  system  of  coaxal  circles,  and  each  circle 
of  either  system  cuts  every  circle  of  the  other  system 
orthogonally. 

Since  the  tangents  to  a  system  of  coaxal  circles  (A)  from  any 
point  P  on  their  radical  axis  are  equal  to  one  another,  it  follows 
that  the  circle  (B)  with  centre  P  and  any  one  of  these  tangents 
as  radius  will  cut  all  the  circles  of  the  system  (A)  orthogonally. 


yb  COAXAL    CIRCLES 

Again,  since  there  is  an  infinite  number  of  positions  of  P  on 
the  radical  axis,  there  is  an  infinite  number  of  circles  (B)  each  of 
which  cuts  all  the  circles  of  the  system  (A)  orthogonally. 

We  have  still  to  show  that  these  cutting  circles  (b)  form 
another  coaxal  system. 

Consider  any  one  circle  of  the  system  (A) ;  the  tangents  from 
its  centre  to  the  orthogonal  circles  (B)  are  each  a  radius  of  the 
(a)  circle,  and  therefore  equal  to  one  another;  similarly  for  any 
other  circle  of  the  system  (A). 

.'.  the  orthogonal  circles  (B)  are  coaxal,  their  radical  axis 
being  the  line  of  centres  of  the  system  (A). 


fig.  56. 


COAXAL   CIRCLES  97 


Theorem  43. 

Of  two  orthogonal  systems  of  coaxal  circles,  one 
system  is  of  the  intersecting  type  and  the  other  of  the 
non-intersecting  type,  and  the  limiting  points  of  the 
latter  are  the  common  points  of  the  former. 

Suppose  that  a  system  (A)  of  coaxal  circles  is  of  the  non- 
intersecting  type  and  has  limiting  points  L  and  L' ;  since  L  and  L' 
are  point  circles  of  the  system,  it  follows  that  all  the  circles  of 
the  orthogonal  system  (B)  pass  through  L  and  L'>  and  therefore 
that  the  system  (B)  is  of  the  intersecting  type,  L  and  L'  being  the 
common  points. 

Again  suppose  the  given  system  is  of  the  intersecting  type, 
M  and  M'  being  the  common  points ;  we  see  that  no  circle  of  the 
orthogonal  system  can  have  its  centre  between  M  and  M';  there- 
fore these  are  the  limiting  points  of  the  orthogonal  system. 

Ex.  410.  Draw  a  system  of  coaxal  circles  which  touch  one  another; 
draw  the  orthogonal  system.  Where  are  their  Hmiting  points  and  common 
points  ? 

Ex.  411.  The  radical  axes  of  a  given  circle  and  the  circles  of  a  coaxal 
system  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  412.  Prove  that  a  common  tangent  to  any  two  circles  is  divided 
harmonically  by  any  coaxal  circle  which  cuts  it. 

Ex.  413.  If  L  is  one  of  the  limiting  points  of  a  system  of  coaxal  circles 
and  XLY  is  any  chord  of  a  circle  of  the  system,  the  distances  of  X,  L,  Y 
from  the  radical  axis  are  in  geometrical  progression. 

Ex.  414.  A  common  tangent  to  any  two  circles  of  a  non-intersecting 
coaxal  system  subtends  a  right  angle  at  each  of  the  limiting  points. 

Ex.  415.  Tlie  polar  of  eitlier  limiting  point  of  a  coaxal  system 
with  regard  to  any  circle  of  the  system  passes  through  the  other 
limiting  point. 

Ex.  416.  The  tangents  to  a  family  of  circles  from  a  point  A  are  all 
equal  to  one  another;  and  the  tangents  from  another  point  B  are  also  equal 
to  one  another;  prove  that  the  circles  are  all  coaxal.  What  is  the  condition 
that  the  system  should  be  of  the  non-intersecting  type,  and  what  are  the 
limiting  points  in  that  case  ? 

G.  S.  M.  G.  .  7 


98  RADICAL  axis;  coaxal  circles 

Ex.  417.  Prove  that  the  polars  of  a  fixed  point  P  with  regard  to  a 
system  of  coaxal  circles  with  real  limiting  points  all  pass  through  another 
fixed  point,  namely  that  point  on  the  circle  through  P  and  the  limiting 
points  which  is  at  the  other  extremity  of  the  diameter  through  P. 


Exercises  on  Chapter  X. 

Ex.  418.  If  T  be  a  point  from  which  equal  tangents  can  be  drawn  to 
two  circles  whose  centres  are  A  and  B,  prove  that  the  chords  of  contact 
of  tangents  from  T  intersect  on  the  line  through  T  at  right  angles  to  AB. 

Ex.  419.  The  mid-points  of  the  four  common  tangents  to  two  non- 
intersecting  circles  are  collinear. 

Ex.  420.  If  each  of  three  circles  intersects  the  other  two,  prove  that 
their  common  chords  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  421.  Three  circles,  centres  D,  E,  F,  touch  each  other  two  and  two 
in  A,  B,  C.     Prove  that  the  circumcircle  of  ABC  is  the  in-circle  of  DEF. 

Ex.  422.  Show  how  to  describe  a  circle  of  a  given  coaxal  system  to 
touch  another  given  circle  (i)  when  the  system  is  of  the  intersecting,  (ii)  of 
the  non-intersecting  type. 

Ex.  423.  Consider  the  various  Apollonius'  circles  for  two  fixed  points 
obtained  by  varying  the  given  ratio  ;  are  they  coaxal  ? 

Ex.  424.  If  a  system  of  circles  have  the  same  polar  with  regard  to  a 
given  point,  show  that  they  are  coaxal,  and  find  the  position  of  the  common 
radical  axis. 

Ex.  425.  Prove  that  the  four  circles  whose  diameters  are  the  common 
tangents  to  two  non-intersecting  circles  have  a  common  radical  axis. 

Ex.  426.  Show  that  the  limiting  points  of  a  pair  of  non-intersecting 
circles  and  the  points  of  contact  of  any  one  of  their  common  tangents  lie  on 
a  circle  cutting  the  two  circles  orthogonally. 

Ex.  427.  The  circle  whose  diameter  is  the  line  joining  the  centres  of 
similitude  of  two  circles  is  coaxal  with  those  circles. 

Ex.  428.  If  two  circles  X  and  Y  cut  orthogonally,  prove  that  the  polar 
with  respect  to  X  of  any  point  A  on  Y  passes  through  B,  the  point  diametri- 
cally opposite  to  A. 

If  the  polars  of  a  point,  with  respect  to  three  circles  whose  centres  are 
on  a  straight  line,  are  concurrent,  prove  that  the  three  circles  are  coaxal. 


COAXAL   CIRCLES  99 

Ex  429.  Prove  that  the  common  orthogonal  circle  of  three  given  circles 
is  the  locus  of  a  point  whose  polars  with  respect  to  the  three  circles  are 
concurrent. 

Ex.  430.  The  external  common  tangent  to  two  circles  which  lie  outside 
one  another  touches  them  in  A  and  B ;  show  that  the  circle  described  on 
AB  as  diameter  passes  through  the  limiting  points  L  and  L'  of  the  coaxal 
system  to  which  the  circles  belong. 

If  O  is  the  mid-point  of  the  above  common  tangent,  prove  that  OL,  OL' 
are  parallel  to  the  internal  common  tangents  of  the  circles. 

Ex.  431.  The  internal  and  external  bisectors  of  the  angles  of  a  triangle 
are  drawn,  and  on  the  lengths  they  intercept  on  the  opposite  sides  circles 
are  described  having  these  intercepts  as  diameters ;  prove  that  these  circles 
all  pass  through  two  points  which  are  collinear  with  the  circumcentre  of 
the  triangle. 

Ex.  432.  Describe  a  circle  which  shall  pass  through  two  given  points 
and  bisect  the  circumference  of  a  given  circle. 

Ex.  433.  Prove  that  all  the  circles  which  bisect  the  circumferences  of 
two  given  circles  pass  through  two  common  points. 

Ex.  434.  ABC  is  a  triangle  and  two  circles  are  drawn,  one  to  touch 
AB  at  A  and  to  pass  through  C,  the  other  to  touch  AC  at  A  and  to  pass 
through  B.  If  the  common  chord  of  these  circles  meets  BC  in  D,  prove 
that  BD  :  DC  =  BA2:  AC2. 

Ex.  435.  A  line  PQ  is  drawn  touching  at  P  a  circle  of  a  coaxal  system 
of  which  the  limiting  points  are  K,  K',  and  Q  is  a  point  on  the  line  on  the 
opposite  side  of  the  radical  axis  to  P ;  show  that,  if  T,  T'  be  the  lengths 
of  the  tangents  drawn  from  P  to  the  two  concentric  circles  of  which  the 
common  centre  is  Q  and  radii  are  respectively  QK,  QK',  then 
T  :  T'  : :  PK  :  PK'. 

Ex.  436.  The  tangents  at  A,  A'  to  one  given  circle  cut  a  given  non- 
intersecting  circle  in  P,  Q  and  P',  Q'  respectively,  and  AA'  cuts  PP'  in  X. 
Show  that,  if  O  is  a  limiting  point  of  the  coaxal  system  determined  by  the 
two  given  circles,  then  will  OX  be  a  bisector  of  the  angle  POP'. 


7—2 


CHAPTER    XI. 


INVERSION. 

Definition.  If  O  is  a  fixed  point  and  P  any  other  point,  and 
if  a  point  P'  is  taken  in  OP  (produced  if  necessary)  such  that 
OP.  OP'  =  A;^  (where  ^  is  a  constant),  P'  is  said  to  be  the  inverse 
of  P  with  regard  to  the  circle  whose  centre  is  O  and  radius  k. 
O  is  called  the  centre  of  inversion,  the  circle  is  called  the 
circle  of  inversion,  and  k  the  radius  of  inversion*. 


From  the  definition  it  is  obvious  that  P  is  the  inverse  of  P'.  Also  that 
OP'  varies  inversely  as  OP  ;  hence  the  name. 

If  P  is  made  to  describe  any  given  figure  and  if  P'  always 
moves  so  that  it  is  the  inverse  of  P,  P'  describes  a  figure  which  is 
called  the  inverse  of  the  given  figure  with  respect  to  the  circle  of 
inversion. 

When  a  large  number  of  inverse  points  have  to  be  found  the  following 
construction  is  useful. 

Assume  the  above  notation  ;  draw  a  circle  of  any  radius  and  a  tangent  to 
it  at  any  point  A;  from  the  tangent  cut  oif  a  length  Ao  =  the  radius  of 
inversion  ;  find  a  point  p  on  the  circle  such  that  op  — OP  ;  let  p'  be  the  other 
point  at  which  op  cuts  the  circle,  then  op' =  OP'. 

Ex.  437.  What  is  the  inverse  of  a  straight  line  when  the  centre  of  in- 
version is  on  the  straight  line  ? 

Ex.  438.  What  is  the  inverse  of  a  given  circle  when  the  centre  of  in- 
version is  the  centre  of  the  given  circle  ? 

*  Sometimes  k'^  is  called  the  constant  of  inversion. 


INVERSION  ,     ,      ,o>J,01. 

Ex.  439.  Draw  a  straight  line  and  mark  a  point  O  4  inches  from  the 
line ;  taking  O  as  centre  and  a  radius  of  inversion  3  inches,  mark  a  number 
of  points  on  the  inverse  of  the  straight  line. 

Ex.  440.  Draw  a  circle  of  radius  2  inches ;  take  a  point  O  1  inch  from 
its  centre ;  taking  O  as  centre  and  1  inch  as  radius  of  inversion,  plot  the 
inverse  of  the  circle. 

Ex.  441.  Draw  a  circle  of  radius  2  inches;  take  a  point  O  3  inches 
from  its  centre ;  taking  O  as  centre  and  2  inches  as  radius  of  inversion,  plot 
the  inverse  of  the  circle. 

Ex.  442.  Plot  a  parabola  and  invert  it  (i)  with  the  focus  as  centre  of 
inversion,  (ii)  with  the  vertex  as  centre  of  inversion. 


Theorem  44. 

If  a  figure  is  inverted  first  with  one  radius  of  inver- 
sion and  then  with  a  different  radius,  the  centre  being 
the  same  in  both  cases,  the  two  inverse  figures  are 
similar  and  similarly  situated,  the  centre  being  their 
centre  of  similitude. 

If  Pi  is  the  inverse  of  a  point  P  when  ky^  is  the  radius  of  in- 
version and  Pg  the  inverse  of  the  same  point  when  A:^  is  the 
radius,  the  centre  O  being  the  same  in  both  cases,  then 

Hence  the  theorem  is  true. 

In  consequence  of  this  property  it  is  generally  unnecessary  to 
specify  the  radius  of  inversion;  in  fact,  it  is  usual  to  make  no 
reference  to  the  circle  of  inversion  and  to  speak  of  inverting  with 
regard  to  a  point. 

Sometimes  we  take  a  negative  constant  of  inversion ;  in  this 
case  the  circle  of  inversion  must  of  necessity  be  avoided  as  it  has 
an  imaginary  radius. 


102 


INVERSION 


Theorem  45. 

The  inverse  of  a  straight  line,  with  regard  to  a  point 
on  it,  is  the  line  itself. 

This  is  obvious  from  the  definition. 


Ex.  443.  What  is  the  inverse  of  a  point  on  the  Hne  which  is  infinitely 
close  to  the  centre  of  inversion  ? 

Ex.  444.     What  is  the  inverse  of  the  line  at  infinity  ? 

Ex.  445.  OABC  is  a  straight  line,  and  A',  B',  C  are  the  inverses  of 
A,  B,  C,  when  O  is  the  centre  of  inversion  ;  if  B  is  the  mid-point  of  AC, 
prove  that  O,  A',  B',  C  is  a  harmonic  range. 

Ex.  446.  If  a  harmonic  range  is  inverted  with  regard  to  any  point  on 
the  line,  another  harmonic  range  is  obtained. 

Ex.  447.     Prove  that  Ex.  445  is  a  particular  case  of  Ex.  446. 


Theorem  46. 

The  inverse  of  a  straight  line,  with  regard  to  a  point 
outside  it,  is  a  circle  through  the  centre  of  inversion. 


fig.  57. 

Let  PA  be  the  given  line  and  O  be  the  centre  of  inversion. 
Draw  OA  i.  to  PA. 


INVERSION  103 

Take  A',  P'  the  inverses  of  A,  P. 

Then  OP.  OP'=:OA.  OA', 

.*.    P,  A,  A',  P'  are  concyclic, 

.-.    Z.OP'A'  =  ^OAP 

=  a  rt.   L. 

But  O  and  A'  are  fixed  points. 

.*.  as  P  moves  along  the  line  PA,  P'  describes  a  circle  on  OA  as 
diameter. 

Ex.  448.  Show  that  Theorem  45  is  not  really  an  exception  to  the 
theorem  that  the  inverse  of  a  straight  line  is  a  circle  through  the  centre  of 
inversion. 

Ex.  449.  Draw  a  figure  showing  the  inverse  of  a  straight  line  with 
regard  to  a  point  outside  it  for  a  negative  constant  of  inversion. 


Theorem  47. 

The  inverse  of  a  circle  with  regard  to  a  point  on  its 
circumference  is  a  straight  line  at  right  angles  to  the 
diameter  through  the  centre  of  inversion. 

The  proof  is  left  to  the  reader. 

Ex.  4 so.     Prove  Theorem  47. 

Ex.  451.  If  a  circle  is  inverted  with  regard  to  a  point  on  it,  the 
centre  of  the  circle  inverts  into  the  image  of  the  centre  of  inversion  in 
the  resulting  straight  line. 

Ex.  462.  A  straight  line  meets  a  circle  a  in  the  points  A,  B  and  a 
circle  /3  in  the  points  O,  D  ;  O  is  a  point  on  the  radical  axis  of  a  and  j3. 
OA,  OB  meet  a  again  at  A',  B'  and  00,  OD  meet  j8  again  at  C,  D'. 
Show  that  O,  A',  B',  C,  D'  lie  on  a  circle. 


104  INVERSION 

Ex.  453.     In  fig.  58,  OA  =  OB,  AP=rPB  =  BP'=P'A; 

(i)   prove  that  OPP'  is  a  straight  line ; 

(ii)  prove  that,  if  O  be  fixed,  P  and  P'  will  move  so  that  they  are 
inverse  points  with  regard  to  O. 


fig.  58. 


Ex.  454.  If,  in  Ex.  453,  C  is  a  fixed  point,  and  P  moves  so  that 
CP  =  CO,  prove  that  the  locus  of  P'  is  a  straight  line. 

Feaucellier's  Cell*.  Fig.  58  suggests  a  mechanical  device,  called  a 
linkage,  for  constructing  the  inverse  of  a  given  figure  ;  a  model  can  be  con- 
structed consisting  of  rods  freely  hinged  at  the  points  O,  A,  B,  P,  P' ;  from 
Ex.  453  we  see  that  if  O  is  fixed  and  P  moved  along  a  given  curve  P' 
describes  the  inverse  curve. 

Ex.  454  shows  that,  if  P  is  made  to  describe  a  circle  through  O,  P' 
moves  on  a  straight  line.  Now  it  is  not  necessary  that  the  rods  should  be 
straight ;  the  only  essential  is  that  the  distance  between  the  points  O  and  A 
should  equal  that  between  O  and  B,  etc.,  and  the  equality  of  these  distances 
can  be  tested  by  superposition.  Thus  this  linkage  enables  us  to  draw  a 
straight  line  without  presupposing  that  we  have  a  straight  edge. 


*  This  linkage  was  invented  in  1873  by  Peaucellier,  a  captain  in  the 
French  army. 


inversion  105 

Theorem  48. 

The  inverse  of  a  circle  with  regard  to  a  point  not  on 
its  circumference  is  another  circle. 


fig.  59.  fig.  60. 

Let  O  be  the  centre  of  inversion. 
Draw  a  line  OPQ  to  cut  the  circle  at  P  and  Q. 
Let  P'  be  the  inverse  of  P. 

Then  OP .  OP'  =  constant. 

But  OP .  OQ  =:  constant, 

.'.    op' :  OQ  =  constant. 

But  the  locus  of  Q  is  a  circle, 

.*.   the  locus  of  P'  is  a  circle. 

I.e.  the  inverse  of  the  given  circle  is  a  circle. 

Note  that  in  figs.  59  and  60  the  parts  of  the  circles  which  are  thickened 
are  inverses  of  one  another. 

Ex.  455.  Show  how  to  invert  a  circle  into  itself,  the  centre  of  inversion 
being  outside  the  circle. 

Ex.  456.  Is  it  possible  to  invert  a  circle  into  itself  (i)  with  regard  to 
a  point  inside  the  circle,  (ii)  with  regard  to  a  point  on  the  circle  ? 

Ex.  457.  Show  how  to  invert  simultaneously  each  of  three  circles  into 
itself. 

Ex.  458.  If  a  circle  is  inverted  witli  regard  to  any  point  not  on 
its  circumference,  its  centre  inverts  into  the  point  at  which  the  line 
of  centres  cuts  the  polar  of  the  centre  of  inversion  with  respect  to 
the  inverse  circle. 

Ex.  459.     Show  that  Ex.  451  is  a  particular  case  of  Ex.  458. 


106 


INVERSION 


Theorem  49. 
Two  curves  intersect  at  the  same   angles  as  their 


inverses. 


fig.  61. 

Let  P  be  a  point  of  intersection. 

Through   O,   the  centre   of   inversion,   draw   a  straight  line 
making  a  small  angle  with  OP  to  cut  the  curves  in  Q  and  R. 
Let  P',  Q',  r'  be  the  inverses  of  P,  Q,  R  respectively. 
Join  PQ,  PR,  PR',  p'Q'. 

Since  OP.  OP'  =  OQ.  OQ', 
.*.    P,  P',  Q',  Q  are  concyclic, 
.*.     ^OPQ=Z.OQ'P'. 
Similarly    lOPR  =  l  OR'P', 
.*.     L  QPR  =  L  R'P'Q'. 
Now,  as  OQ  moves  up  to  OP,  so  PQ,  PR,  P'Q',  P'r'  move  up  to 
and  in  the  limit  coincide  with  the  tangents  to  the  curves  at  P 
and  P'. 

.'.    the  angles   between  the  tangents  at   P  are  equal  to  the 
angles  between  the  tangents  at  P'. 

.*.  two  curves  cut  at  the  same  angles  as  their  inverses. 

Ex.  460.     Give  an  independent  proof  of  Theorem  49  in  the  case  of  two 
straight  lines  inverted  into  a  straight  line  and  a  circle. 

Ex.  461.     Give  an  independent  proof  of  Theorem  49  in  the  case  of  two 
straight  lines  inverted  into  two  circles. 

Ex.  462.     Prove  that  the  tangent  to  a  curve  from  the  centre  of  inver- 
sion is  also  a  tangent  to  the  inverse  curve. 


INVERSION 


107 


By  applying  the  above  results  we  can  deduce  new  theorems 
from  theorems  we  know  already;  this  process  is  called  inverting 
a  theorem. 


Example  I. 
Invert  the  following  theorem  with  regard  to  the  point  O  : — 

If  O,  A,  B,  C  are  four  points  on  a  circle,  angles  AOC,  ABC  are 
equal  or  supplementary. 

Let  a',  B",  C'  be  the  inverses  of  A,  B,  C. 

We  will  write  the  corresponding  properties  of  the  figure  and 
its  inverse  in  parallel  columns. 

[It  is  convenient  to  draw  the  figures  separately.] 


fig.  62. 


fig.  63. 


OABC  is  a  circle, 
OA,  OC  are  st.  lines, 
AB  is  a  st.  line, 
BC  is  a  St.  line, 

L  AOC  is  equal  or  supplemen- 
tary to  L  ABC. 


A'b'C'  is  a  straight  line, 
OA',  OC'  are  st.  lines, 
OA'B'  is  a  circle, 
OB'C'  is  a  circle, 

L  A'OC'  is  equal  or  supplemen- 
tary to  L  at  which  circles 
OA'B',  OB'C'  intersect. 

Hence  we  deduce  the  theorem  that,  if  A'B'C'  is  a  straight  line, 
and  O  a  point  outside  it,  the  angles  at  which  the  circles  OB'A', 
OB'C'  intersect  are  equal  or  supplementary  to  the  angle  A'OC'. 


108 


INVERSION 


Example  II. 

Prove  the  following  theorem  by  inverting  with  regard  to  the 
point  O.  AOBF,  AOCE  are  two  circles  intersecting  at  O,  A;  FO  a 
diameter  of  the  first  cuts  the  second  at  C,  EO  a  diameter  of  the 
second  cuts  the  first  at  B;  then  AO  passes  through  the  centre 
of  the  circle  OBC. 


Let  A',  B' 


be  the  inverses  of  A.  B, 


We  will  now  write  the  corresponding  properties  of  the  figure 
and  its  inverse  in  parallel  columns. 


fig.  65. 


fig.  64. 


AOBF,    AOCE    are    two    circles 
through  A,  O, 

FO,  a  diameter  of  0AOBF,  cuts 

0AOCE  at  C; 
EO,  a  diameter  of  0AOCE,  cuts 

©AOBF  at  B. 
To  prove  that  AO  passes  through 

the  centre  of  0OBC. 


A'B'F',  A'C'E'  are  two  st.  lines 
through  A', 

F'O,  the  perpendicular  from  O 
on  A'b'F',  cuts  A'C'E'  at  C'; 

E'O,  the  perpendicular  from  O 
on  A'C'E',  cuts  A'b'F'  at  B'. 

To  prove  that  AO    is   perpen- 
dicular to  B'C'. 


Now  we  see  that  the  inverse  theorem  is  true  (it  is  the  ortho- 
centre  property  of  a  triangle). 


the  original  theorem  is  true. 


INVERSION  109 

Ex.  463.  Invert  the  following  theorem  with  regard  to  the  point  O  :  If 
O,  A,  B,  C  are  four  points  on  a  circle,  angles  OAC,  OBC  are  equal  or 
supplementary. 

Ex.  464.  Invert  the  theorem  'The  angle  in  a  semicircle  is  a  right  angle  * 
with  regard  to  one  end  of  the  diameter. 

Ex.  465.  OP  and  OQ  are  lines  through  a  fixed  point  O,  inclined  at  a 
constant  angle  and  intersecting  a  fixed  line  in  P,  Q ;  the  envelope  of  the 
circle  round  OPQ  will  be  another  circle. 

Ex.  466.  Prove  by  inversion  (or  otherwise)  that  if  the  circumcircles  of 
two  triangles  ABC,  ABD  cut  orthogonally,  then  the  circumcircles  of  CAD 
and  CBD  also  cut  orthogonally. 

Ex.  467.  Prove  by  inversion  that  the  circles  having  for  diameters  three 
chords  OA,  OB,  OC  of  a  circle  intersect  again  by  pairs  in  three  coUinear 
points. 

Ex.  468.  Three  circles  OBC,  OBE,  OCF  pass  through  a  point  O;  OBF 
is  a  straight  line  passing  through  the  centre  of  the  circle  OCF;  OCE  is  a 
straight  line  passing  through  the  centre  of  the  circle  OBE;  prove  that 
circles  OBE,  OCF  intersect  on  OD  the  diameter  through  O  of  the  circle 
OBC. 

Ex.  469.     Prove  by  inversion  that  a  straight  line  drawn  through  a  point 
O  to  cut  a  circle  is  divided  harmonically  by  the  circle  and  the  polar  of  O. 
[Invert  with  regard  to  O.] 

Ex.  470.  Tlie  limiting  points  of  a  coaxal  system  are  inverse 
points  witli  regard  to  any  circle  of  the  system. 

Ex.  471.  A  system  of  intersecting  coaxal  circles  inverted  with 
regard  to  a  point  of  intersection  becomes  a  system  of  straight  lines 
through  a  point. 

Ex.  472.  Invert  the  following  theorem  with  regard  to  the  point  O:  If 
each  of  a  system  of  circles  passes  through  two  given  points  O  and  O', 
another  system  of  circles  can  be  described  which  cut  the  circles  of  the  first 
system  orthogonally. 

Ex.  473.  A  system  of  non -intersecting  coaxal  circles  inverted 
with  respect  to  a  limiting  point  of  the  system  becomes  a  system  of 
concentric  circles  having  the  inverse  of  the  other  limiting  point  for 
centre. 

[Consider  the  orthogonal  system  of  circles  and  use  Ex.  472.] 


110  INVERSION 

Ex.  474.  What  is  the  inverse  of  a  system  of  intersecting  coaxal  circles 
with  respect  to  any  point  ? 

Ex.  475.  What  is  the  inverse  of  a  system  of  non-intersecting  coaxal 
circles  with  respect  to  any  point  ? 

Inversion  may  be  applied  to  geometry  of  three  dimensions. 

By  rotating  the  figures  of  theorems  46,  47,  48  about  the  line 
through  the  centre  of  inversion  and  the  centres  of  the  circles  we 
arrive  at  the  following  results  : 

(i)  The  inverse  of  a  plane  with  regard  to  a  point  outside  it 
is  a  sphere  through  the  centre  of  inversion. 

(ii)  The  inverse  of  a  sphere  with  regard  to  a  point  on  its 
surface  is  a  plane  at  right  angles  to  the  diameter  through  the 
centre  of  inversion. 

(iii)  The  inverse  of  a  sphere  with  regard  to  a  point  not  on  its 
surface  is  another  sphere. 

Ex.  476.  What  is  the  inverse  of  a  circle  with  regard  to  a  point  not  in 
its  plane  ? 

[Regard  the  circle  as  the  intersection  of  a  sphere  and  a  plane.] 

Ex.  477.  A  circle  is  inverted  with  respect  to  a  sphere  whose  centre  O 
does  not  lie  in  the  plane  of  the  circle ;  prove  that  the  inverse  is  a  circle,  and 
show  that  the  point  P  which  inverts  into  the  centre  of  the  inverse  circle  is 
obtained  thus  :  Describe  a  sphere  through  O  and  the  circumference  of  the 
given  circle ;  then  P  is  the  pole  of  the  plane  of  the  circle  with  respect  to 
this  sphere. 


Exercises  on  Chapter  XL 

Ex.  478.     Q  is  the  inverse  of  P  with  respect  to  a  circle  whose  centre 
is  O,  AQB  is  any  chord  of  the  circle  ;  prove  that  PQ  bisects  the  angle  APB. 

Ex.  479.    A  circle,  its  inverse,  and  the  circle  of  inversion  are  coaxal 
with  one  another. 

Ex.  480.     Show  that  it  is  possible  to  invert  three  circles  so  that  the 
centres  of  the  inverse  circles  are  collinear. 


INVERSION  111 

Ex.  481.  If  two  circles  cut  orthogonally  the  inverse  of  the  centre  of  the 
first  with  respect  to  the  second  coincides  with  the  inverse  of  the  centre  of 
tbe  second  with  respect  to  the  first. 

Ex.  482.  Two  points  are  inverse  with  respect  to  a  circle  ;  show  that,  if 
the  figure  be  inverted  with  respect  to  any  circle,  the  new  figure  will  have  the 
same  property. 

Ex.  483.  A,  B,.C  are  three  points  in  a  straight  line  and  P  any  other 
point.  AFE,  BFD,  CED  are  drawn  perpendicular  to  PA,  PB,  PC  respectively  ; 
prove  that  P,  D,  E,  F  lie  in  a  circle. 

Obtain  a  new  theorem  by  inverting  with  respect  to  P. 

Ex.  484.  If  c  is  the  distance  between  the  centres  of  two  intersecting 
circles  whose  radii  are  r,  r',  show  that  the  ratio  c^-r^-r'^  :  rr'  is  unaltered 
by  inversion  with  regard  to  any  point  external  to  the  two  circles. 

Ex.  485.  Two  circles  intersect  at  O  and  P  and  their  tangents  at  O  meet 
the  circles  again  at  A  and  B.  Show  that  the  circle  circumscribing  the 
triangle  AOB  cuts  OP  produced  at  a  point  Q  such  that  0Q=20P,  and  that 
if  a  line  is  drawn  through  P  parallel  to  the  tangent  at  O  to  the  circle  AOB, 
then  the  part  of  this  line  intercepted  between  OA  and  OB  is  bisected  at  P. 

Ex.  486.  If  A,  B^  C  be  three  collinear  points  and  O  any  other  point, 
show  that  the  centres  P,  Q,  R  of  the  three  circles  circumscribing  the  triangles 
OBC,  OCA,  CAB  are  concyclic  with  O.  Also  that  if  three  other  circles  are 
drawn  through  O,  A ;  O,  B  ;  O,  C  to  cut  the  circles  OBC,  OCA,  CAB, 
respectively,  at  right  angles,  then  these  three  circles  will  meet  in  a  point 
which  lies  on  the  circumcircle  of  the  quadrilateral  OPQR. 

Ex.  487.  From  any  point  P  on  the  circle  ABC  a  pair  of  tangents  PQ, 
PR  are  drawn  to  the  circle  DEF  and  the  chord  QR  is  bisected  in  S.  Show 
that  the  locus  of  S  is  a  circle  ;  except  when  the  circle  ABC  passes  through 
the  centre  of  the  circle  DEF,  in  which  case  the  locus  of  S  is  a  straight  line. 

Ex.  488.  Through  one  of  the  points  of  intersection  of  two  given  circles 
any  line  is  drawn  which  cuts  the  circles  again  in  P,  Q  respectively.  Prove 
that  the  middle  point  of  PO  is  on  a  circle  whose  centre  is  midway  between 
the  centres  of  the  given  circles. 

Ex.  489.     Show  that  there  is  in  general  one  circle  of  a  coaxal  system 
which  cuts  a  given  circle  orthogonally. 
What  is  the  exceptional  case? 

Ex.  490.  Show  that  circles  which  cut  one  given  circle  orthogonally  and 
another  given  circle  at  a  given  angle  will  also  cut  a  third  fixed  circle  at  the 
same  fixed  angle. 


112  INVEKSION 

Ex.  491.  A,  B,  C,  D  are  four  coplanar  points.  Prove  that  in  an  infinite 
number  of  ways  two  circles  can  be  drawn  making  an  assigned  angle  with 
each  other,  and  such  that  A  and  B  are  a  pair  of  inverse  points  of  one  circle, 
and  C  and  D  of  the  other  circle. 

Ex.  492.  If  P',  Q'  are  the  inverses  of  P,  Q  with  respect  to  a  point  O, 
PQ  :  P'Q'=  OP  .  OQ  :  fc2^  where  A; 2  is  the  constant  of  inversion. 

Ex.  493.  Invert  with  respect  to  the  point  O  the  proposition  :  If  PAQ, 
RAS  are  two  chords  of  a  circle  which  passes  through  O,  the  rectangle 
PA  .  AR  =  rectangle  RA  .  AS. 

Ex.  494.  The  sides  of  a  triangle  ABC  touch  a  circle  whose  centre  is  O, 
and  on  OB,  00  produced,  if  necessary,  are  taken  points  B'  and  C  respec- 
tively such  that  OB  .  OB'  =  OC  .  00'=  0A2.  Prove  that  O  is  the  orthocentre 
of  the  triangle  AB'C. 

Ex.  495.  Two  given  circles  intersect  in  a  point  O  ;  prove,  by  the  method 
of  inversion,  that  the  inverse  point  of  O  with  respect  to  any  circle  which 
touches  them  lies  on  one  or  other  of  two  fixed  circles  which  cut  one  another 
orthogonally. 

Ex.  496.  If  two  circles  be  inverted  with  respect  to  a  circle  whose  centre 
is  at  their  external  centre  of  similitude  and  whose  (radius)^  is  equal  to  the 
rectangle  contained  by  the  tangents  to  the  circles  from  its  centre,  prove 
that  the  radical  axis  of  the  two  circles  inverts  into  the  circle  on  the  line 
joining  the  two  centres  of  similitude  as  diameter. 

Ex.  497.  Prove  that  any  two  circles  are  inverse  to  one  another  with 
respect  to  some  third  circle  ;  and  that  with  any  point  on  this  third  circle  as 
origin  of  inversion  the  two  circles  will  invert  into  equal  circles. 

Ex.  498.  (i)  A  sphere  is  inverted  from  a  point  on  its  surface;  show 
that  to  a  system  of  parallels  and  meridians  on  the  surface  will  correspond 
two  systems  of  coaxal  circles  in  the  inverse  figure. 

(ii)  Prove  that,  if  P,  Q  be  the  ends  of  a  diameter  of  a  small  circle  of  a 
sphere,  O  a  point  of  the  great  circle  PQ,  and  R  any  point  on  the  circle,  then 
the  arcs  of  the  small  circles  PRO,  RQO  are  perpendicular  to  each  other  at  R. 

Ex.  499.  (i)  A  circle  is  inverted  from  a  point  which  is  not  upon  its 
circumference  and  not  necessarily  in  the  plane  of  the  circle.  Show  that  the 
inverse  curve  is  also  a  circle. 

(ii)  Circles  are  drawn  to  cut  a  given  circle  orthogonally  at  two  points 
of  intersection  and  to  pass  through  a  given  point  not  in  the  plane  of  the 
circle.  Show  that  they  intersect  in  another  common  point ;  and  hence  show 
how  a  circle  and  a  point  not  in  its  plane  may  be  inverted  respectively  into 
circle  and  centre. 


INVERSION  113 

Ex.  500.  Show  that  the  locus  of  points  with  respect  to  which  an  anchor 
ring  can  be  inverted  into  another  anchor  ring  consists  of  a  straight  line  and 
a  circle. 

Ex.  501.  The  figures  inverse  to  a  given  figure  with  regard  to  two  circles 
Ci  and  C2  are  denoted  by  Si  and  S2  respectively ;  show  that,  if  Ci  and  C2 
cut  orthogonally,  the  inverse  of  Si  with  regard  to  C2  is  also  the  inverse  of  82 
with  regard  to  Ci. 

Ex.  502.  r  is  a  circle  and  P  and  Q  are  any  two  points  inverse  to  it; 
r' ,  P' ,  Q'  are  the  respective  inverses  with  regard  to  any  point.  Show  that 
P',  Q'  are  inverse  points  with  regard  to  the  circle  V. 

Ex.  503.  (i)  Show  that,  if  the  circles  inverse  to  two  given  circles  ACD, 
BCD  with  respect  to  a  point  P  be  equal,  the  circle  PCD  bisects  (internally 
or  externally)  the  angles  of  intersection  of  the  two  given  circles. 

(ii)  Prove  that  four  points  P,  Q,  R,  8  can  be  found  such  that  with 
respect  to  any  one  of  them  the  points  inverse  to  four  given  points  A,  B,  C,  D 
form  a  triangle  and  its  orthocentre ;  and  that  the  points  inverse  to  P,  Q,  R,  8 
with  respect  to  any  one  of  the  four  A,  B,  C,  D  also  form  a  triangle  and  its 
orthocentre. 

Ex.  504.  A  circle  moving  in  a  plane  always  touches  a  fixed  circle,  and 
the  tangent  to  the  moving  circle  from  a  fixed  point  is  always  of  constant 
length.     Prove  that  the  moving  circle  always  touches  another  fixed  circle. 


G.  s.  M.  Q. 


CHAPTER    XII. 

ORTHOGONAL   PROJECTION. 

Suppose  that  we  have  a  plane  (say  a  sheet  of  glass)  with  a 
variety  of  figures  drawn  upon  it. 

And  let  this  plane  be  placed,  in  an  inclined  position^  above  a 
second — horizontal — plane. 

If  a  distant  light  (e.g.  the  sun)  be  allowed  to  shine  upon  the 
figures  drawn  on  the  glass,  and  to  cast  shadows  of  them  upon 
the  horizontal  plane,  these  shadows  would  be  '  projections '  of  the 
original  figures. 

If  the  sun  is  directly  overhead,  so  that  its  rays  strike  per- 
pendicularly upon  the  horizontal  plane,  the  projection  is  called 
'orthogonal.' 

The  definition  of  orthogonal  projection  is  as  follows . 

Definition.  Let  there  be  an  assembly  of  points  (a)  in  a 
plane  {p).  From  each  point  let  a  perpendicular  be  drawn  to 
a  second  plane  {q).  The  feet  of  these  perpendiculars  together 
constitute  the  orthogonal  projection  of  the  assembly  {a). 

We  must  now  enquire  what  relations  exist  between  figures 
and  their  orthogonal  projections  upon  other  'planes  of  projection.' 

In  what  follows,  it  must  be  assumed  that  the  projection  is 
orthogonal  unless  the  contrary  is  stated  or  distinctly  implied. 

1.     The  projection  of  a  straight  line  is  a  straight  line. 
The  perpendiculars  from  all  points  on  the  original  line  form 
a  plane,  which  cuts  the  plane  of  projection  in  a  straight  line. 


ORTHOGONAL    PROJECTION 


115 


2.  A  point  of  intersection  of  two  curves  in  the 
original  plane  projects  into  a  point  of  intersection  of 
the  resulting  curves. 

3.  A  tangent  to  a  curve,  and  its  point  of  contact, 
project  into  a  tangent  to  the  resulting  curve  and  its  point 
of  contact. 

4.  The  lengths  of  lines  are  usually  altered  by  orthogonal 
projection  ;  in  fact,  the  lines  are  foreshortened. 

Ex.  505.  Take  the  case  of  projection  on  to  a  horizontal  plane  from  a 
plane  inclined  to  it  at  60°. 

Prove  that  all  the  lines  of  steepest  slope  are  halved  by  projection. 

Are  any  lines  unaltered  by  projection  ? 

What  is  the  condition  that  two  lines  that  are  equal  before  projection  shal 
remain  equal  after  projection? 

If  a  be  the  length  of  a  segment  of  one  of  the  lines  of 
steepest  slope  in  a  plane,  and  0  the  angle  which  the  plane 
makes  with  the  plane  of  projection,  then  «cos^  is  the 
length  of  the  projection  of  a. 


AB  is  the  segment  a,  CD  is  its  projection. 
In  the  plane  AEC  draw  BF  i|  to  DC,  meeting  AC  in  F. 
Then    ^  ABF  =  ^  AEC  =  (9, 
.*.    DC  =  BF  ==  acos^. 


8—2 


116  ORTHOGONAL    PROJECTION 

5.  Lines  parallel  to  the  plane  of  projection  are  un- 
altered in  length  by  projection. 

6.  If  A  be  an  area  in  a  plane,  its  projection  has  area 
A  cos  6. 


fig.  67. 

Let  the  area  be  divided  up  into  strips  A  BCD  by  lines  of 
steepest  slope. 

By  drawing  parallels  to  the  plane  of  projection,  cut  off  a 
rectangle  AECF  from  each  strip. 

Let  A'E'C'F'  be  the  projection  of  AECF. 

Now  A'  F'  =  AF  cos  6,  A'  E'  =  AE. 

.'.    rect.  A'E'C'F'  =  rect.  AECF  x  cos  ^. 

If  the  strips  become  very  narrow  (and  therefore  numerous), 
then  each  strip  tends  to  equality  with  the  corresponding  rectangle, 
the  neglected  portions  being  comparatively  unimportant ;  and  it 
is  shown  in  the  infinitesimal  calculus  that,  in  the  limit,  no  error 
is  made  by  regarding  the  area  as  composed  of  infinitely  narrow 
rectangles. 

But  each  rectangle  is  diminished  by  projection,  in  the  ratio 
cos^  :  1. 

.*.    the  projection  has  area  A  cos  B. 

Ex.  506.  Give  an  independent  proof  of  the  above  theorem  for  a  triangle, 
by  drawing  through  its  vertices  perpendiculars  to  the  line  of  intersection  of 
the  planes,  and  considering  the  three  trapezia  thus  formed. 

Hence  prove  the  theorem  for  any  rectilinear  figure. 


ORTHOGONAL    PROJECTION  117 

7.  Parallel  lines  project  into  parallel  lines. 

The  intersection  of  the  two  parallel  lines  is  a  point  at  infinity. 
This  projects  into  a  point  at  infinity. 
Therefore  the  two  projected  lines  are  parallel. 

8.  Parallel  lines  are  diminished,  by  projection,  in  the 
same  ratio. 


fig.  68. 

AB,  A'b'  are  parallel;  CD,  C'D'  are  their  projections. 

Draw  AE  ||  to  CD,  A'E'  to  C'D'. 

Let  AE  meet  BD  in  E,  A'E'  meet  B'd'  in  E'. 

Now  CD  is  II  to  C'D'  by  (7).     Thus  we  have  AE  ||  to  CD,  CD 
to  C'  D',  C'  D'  II  to  A'  E'. 

.*.    AE  is  II  to  A'E'. 

Also  AB  is  II  to  A'B'. 

.*.   by  a  theorem  in  solid  geometry 

Z.BAE  =  z.B'A'E',   =:<^  (say), 

.*.    AE  =  AB  cos  <;^,  A'  E'  =  A'  B'  cos  </>. 

But  AE  =  CD,  the  proj"  of  AB,  and  A'E'  =  C'D',  the  proj"  of 


AB' 


Therefore  the  two  parallel  lines  are  both  diminished  in  the 
same  ratio  by  projection. 


118  ORTHOGONAL   PROJECTION 

9.  If  a  line  and  any  number  of  points  on  it  be  pro- 
jected, the  projection  is  divided  in  the  same  ratio  as  the 
original  line. 

This  follows  from  (8).     The  following  particular  case  is  useful. 

10.  The  projection  of  the  mid-point  of  a  line  bisects 
the  projection  of  the  line. 

11.  It  has  been  seen  that  a  number  of  geometrical  relations 
are  unaltered  by  orthogonal  projection ;  and  the  beginner  may 
be  tempted  to  apply  this  principle  too  freely. 

It  must  be  noted  that,  as  a  rule,  angle  properties  are  destroyed 
by  orthogonal  projection. 


Ex.  607.     Discover  cases  in  which  a  right  angle  is  unaltered  by  pro- 
jection. 

Ex.  508.     One  arm  of  an  angle  is  |1  to  the  plane  of  projection.     Is  the 
angle  increased  or  diminished  by  projection  ? 

Ex.  509.     One  arm  of  an  angle  is  a  line  of  greatest  slope.    Is  the  angle 
increased  or  diminished  by  projection  ? 

Ex.  510.    Answer  the  question  of  Ex.  609  for  an  angle  whose  bisector  is 
(i)   a  line  of  greatest  slope, 
(ii)  a  parallel  to  the  plane  of  projection. 

Ex.  511.    Discover  any  case  in  which  the  relation  of  an  angle  and  its 
bisector  is  unchanged  by  projection. 

Ex.  512.     Prove  that  the  relation  of  Ex.  511  is  not  preserved  generally, 
by  considering  the  particular  case  of 

(i)    a  right  angle  with  one  arm  ||  to  the  plane  of  projection, 

(ii)  a  square  and  its  diagonal. 


ORTHOGONAL   PKOJECTION  119 

Ex.  513.    Ascertain  which  of  the  following  relations  are  unchanged  by 
projection,  (a)  generally,  (6)  in  particular  cases  : 

(i)    triangle  and  orthocentre, 

(ii)   triangle  and  circumcentre, 
(iii)  triangle  and  centroid, 

(iv)  isosceles  triangle, 

(v)    right-angled  triangle, 

(vi)  parallelogram, 
(vii)  rectangle, 
(viii)  rhombus, 

(ix)   trapezium, 

(x)    circle, 

(xi)   a  set  of  equivalent  triangles,  on  the  same  base  and  on  the  same 

side  of  it, 
(xii)  a  set  of  triangles  with  the  same  base  and  equal  vertical  angles. 

Ex.   514.     If  the  original  plane  is  covered  with  squared  paper,  what  is 
the  corresponding  pattern  on  the  plane  of  projection  ? 

Ex.  515.     If  a  triangle  is  projected  orthogonally,  the  centroid  of  the 
triangle  projects  into  the  centroid  of  the  projection. 


The  Ellipse. 

The  most  interesting  application  of  the  method  of  orthogonal 
projection  is  that  derived  from  the  circle. 

The  circle  projects  into  an  oval  curve  called  an  ellipse ;  it  is 
flattened  or  foreshortened  along  the  lines  of  steepest  slope,  while 
the  dimensions  parallel  to  the  plane  of  projection  are  unaltered. 

If  we  define  the  ellipse,  for  present  purposes,  as  the  curve 
whose  equation  is 

a''      b^~    ' 
it  is  easy  to  prove  that  the  ellipse  is  the  projection  of  a  circle. 


120 


OKTHOGONAL    PROJECTION 


fig.  69. 


Let  the  circle  (centre  O)  be  referred  to  rectangular  axes  OX, 
OY ;  OX  being  i|  to  the  plane  of  projection. 

The  coordinates  of  a  point  p  on  the  O  are  0?i,  pn. 
Let  On  =  X,  pn  =  Y,  radius  —  a. 

Then  x'  +  Y''^  a\ 

The  projections  of  OX,  OY  are  the  perpendicular  lines  CA,  CB; 
these  shall  be  the  axes  for  the  ellipse. 

The  coordinates  of  the  point  P  on  the  ellipse  are  ON,  PN. 
Now  ON  =  O^i  =  X. 
Let  PH=y. 
Then  y  =  YcosO, 


a;2  + 


or 


V? 


cos^^ 
cos^  0 


But  CB,  the  projection  of  OY,  =  a  cos  B.     Let  CB  =  6. 
Then  the  coordinates  of  P  satisfy  the  equation 

a?      h^~ 

The  locus  of  P  is  therefore  an  ellipse  whose  semiaxes  are 
CA  {a)  and  CB  (6). 

The  angle  properties  of  the  circle  do  not  admit  of  transference 
to  the  ellipse.     But  there  are  many  important  properties  that 


ORTHOGONAL    PROJECTION  121 

may  be  transferred,  and   the  chief  of  these   are  given   in   the 
following  exercises. 

Ex.  516.  Prove  the  following  properties  of  the  ellipse,  by 
first  proving  the  allied  property  of  the  circle,  and  then  carefully 
showing  that  the  property  admits  of  projection. 

(1)  Every  chord  of  the  ellipse  through  C  is  bisected  at  C. 
(These  chords  are  called  diameters.) 

(2)  The  tangents  at  the  extremities  of  a  diameter  are  parallel. 

(3)  The  locus  of  the  mid-points  of  a  series  of  parallel  chords 
is  a  straight  line,  namely  a  diameter. 

(4)  If  a  diameter  CP  bisects  chords  parallel  to  a  diameter 
CD,  then  CD  bisects  chords  parallel  to  CP. 

(Such  diameters  are  called  conjugate.) 

(5)  The  lines  joining  a  point  on  an  ellipse  to  the  extremities 
of  a  diameter  are  parallel  to  a  pair  of  conjugate  diameters. 

(6)  A  diameter  bisects  all  chords  parallel  to  the  tangents  at 
its  extremities. 

(7)  If  a  pair  of  conjugate  diameters  meet  the  tangent  at 
P  in  T,  T',  and  CD  be  conjugate  to  CP,  then  PT .  PT'  =  CD^. 

(8)  The  chord  of  contact  of  the  tangents  from  T  is  bisected 
byCT. 

(9)  If  CT  meet  the  curve  in  P  and  the  chord  of  contact  of 
the  tangents  from  T  in  N,  then 

CN  .  CT  =  CP2. 

(10)  Through  a  point  O  are  drawn  two  chords  ^Op',  qOq' ; 
and  diameters  PCP',  QCQ'  are  drawn  \\  to  the  chords.     Then 

Op  .  Op   :  Oq  .  Oq'  -  CP^  :  CQ^. 

(11)  Tangents  Tp,  Tq  are  drawn  from  T,  and  PCP',  QCQ' 
are  the  parallel  diameters.     Then 

Tp'  :  Tg2^Cp2  :  CQ^. 


122  ORTHOGONAL   PROJECTION 

(12)  PCP',  DCD'  are  a  fixed  pair  of  conjugate  diameters; 
Q  is  a  variable  point  on  the  ellipse.  QV  is  drawn  ||  to  DC  to 
meet  PCP'  in  V.     Then 

QV^  :  PV  .  VP'  =  CD^  :  CP2  =  constant. 

(13)  The  area  of  the  ellipse  is  irah. 

(14)  A  circumscribing  parallelogram  is  formed  by  the  tangents 
at  the  extremities  of  a  pair  of  conjugate  diameters.  Its  area  is 
constant  and  equal  to  iah. 

(15)  CP,  CD  being  conjugate  semi-diameters, 

CP2  +  CD^  =  constant  =  a^  -V  h\ 

(16)  If  all  the  ordinates  of  a  circle  be  reduced  in  a  fixed 
ratio,  the  resulting  curve  is  an  ellipse. 

Ex.  517.  By  the  method  of  projection,  discover  some  harmonic  pro- 
perties of  the  ellipse. 

Ex.  518.  From  a  point  P  on  an  ellipse  a  perpendicular  PN  is  drawn  to 
the  major  axis  ACA';  NQ  is  drawn  parallel  to  AP  and  meets  CP  in  Q. 
Prove  that  AQ  is  parallel  to  the  tangent  at  P. 


CHAPTEH    XIII. 


CROSS-RATIO. 

Definition.     A  system  of  points  on  a  straight  line  is  called  a 
range ;  the  line  is  called  the  base  of  the  range. 

Definition.     A  system  of  lines  through  a  point  is  called  a 
pencil ;  the  point  is  called  the  vertex  of  the  pencil. 

Definition.     If  A,  B,  C,  D  be  a  range  of  4  points,  and  if  C,  D 
be  regarded  as  dividing  the  line  AB  (internally  or  externally), 

then  -—  :  —  is  called  a  cross-ratio  or  anharmonic  ratio  of 
CB     DB 

the  range  ABCD,  and  is  written  {AB,  CD};  the  sense  of  lines  is 

taken  into  account. 

Ranges  of  equal  cross-ratio  are  called  equicross. 

A C  B      D 

|< 2"-  -  -- J<  -  -1  -  -A -  3"  - >l 

fig.  70. 


Ex.  519.  Calculate  {AB,  CD}  for  the  above  range.  Also  calculate 
{CD,  AB},  {AC,  BD},  and  all  the  other  cross-ratios  obtainable  by  pair- 
ing  the  points  in  different  ways. 

Ex.  520.  If  a  range  ABCD  is  inverted,  with  respect  to  a  point  on  the 
same  line,  into  a  range  A'B'C'D',  then  {AB,  CD}  =  {A'B',  CD'} .  Examine 
what  this  leads  to  if  A  coincides  with  O,  and  {OB,  CD}  is  harmonic. 


124  CROSS-RATIO 

Ex.  521.     If  a  pencil  of  four  lines  is  cut  by  two  parallel  lines  in  ranges 
ABCD,  A'B'C'D',  then  {AB,  CD}  =  {A'B',  CD'}. 

Ex.  522.     If  {AB,  CD}  =  {AB,  CE},  then  the  points  D  and  E  coincide. 

Ex.  523.     The  projection  of  a  range  ABCD  on  any  line  is  A'B'C'D' ; 
prove  that  {AB,  CD}  =  {A'B',  CD'}. 

Ex.  524.     Investigate  the  cases 

{AB,  CD}  =  1,  {AB,CD}=0,  {AB,CD}  =  oc. 

From  the  definition  of  cross-ratio,  it  is  clear  that  one  of  the 
cross-ratios  of  a  harmonic  range  is  equal  to  —  1. 

Ex.  525.     If  {AB,  CD}  =  {AB,  DC},  then  ACBD  is  a  harmonic  range. 

Ex.  526.     If  A,  B,  C,  D  be  collinear,  and  C,  D'  be  the  harmonic  con- 
jugates of  C,  D  respectively  with  respect  to  A,  B  ;  then 

{AB,  CD}  =  {AB,  CD'}. 


As  four  letters  admit  of  twenty-four  permutations,  the  cross-ratio  of  a 
range  A,  B,  C,  D  can  be  written  down  in  twenty-four  ways.  These  will  not 
give  rise,  however,  to  twenty-four  different  cross-ratios. 

To  begin  with,  {AB,  CD}  =  {CD,  AB}  ; 

X       ,AD    ^r^)      AC    AD      AC.  DB 
for   {AB,CD}  =  ^:^=^3^^, 

^     r^r.    Ao.     CA     CB      CA.BD      AC  .  DB 
and    {CD,AB}  =  ^:3^  =  ^^-^  =  ^3-^. 

In  the  same  way  it  is  shown  that 

{AB,  CD}:={BA,  DC}. 

Thus  {AB,  CD}  =  {CD,  AB}:={BA,  DC}  =  {DC,  BA}, 

a  group  of  four  equal  cross-ratios. 

This  reduces  the  possible  number  of  different  cross-ratios  to  six  ;  and  it 
will  now  be  shown  that  these  six  are  generally  unequal. 

AC  .  DB 
For,  let{AB,CD}=^g-^=X. 


CROSS-RATIO  125 

Then,  interchanging  the  first  pair, 

^       '         '      CA  .  BD      AC  .  DB       \ 
Again,    {AC,  BD}zrl-X. 
For  AB.CD  +  AC.  DB  +  AD.  BC  =  0.  (See  Ex.  2,  p.  4.) 

AB  .  CD      AC  .  DB 
•'ad  .  BC  "''AD.  BC"*" 

„  ,  ab  .  cd   ab  /ad   ,^^  „^, 
^"*ad7bc--bc/dc=-^a^'^^^ 

^  AC  .  DB     AC  /AD     ,.-,    __, 

^"^a^:bc  =  -cb/db=-^^^'^^^' 

.-.  {AC,  BD}=1-{AB,  CD} 
=  1-X. 

Interchanging  the  first  pair  of  {AC,  BD}, 

{CA,  BD}  =  ^-^. 

Again,  as  before, 

{BC,  AD}  =  1-{BA,  CD} 

_X-1 
~     \     * 

and   {CB,  AD}=-^,  . 

A  —  1 

We  thus  have  six  different  cross-ratios, 

X         1         1       >  1  ^-1  ^ 

^'    \'         ^'    1-X'      X    '   x-1  • 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  there  is  seldom  any  need  to  consider  these  various 
cross-ratios ;  it  is  customary  to  use  the  same  cross-ratio  throughout  a  given 
calculation,  and  it  does  not  often  become  necessary  to  define  which  of  the 
six  possible  cross-ratios  is  being  used.  The  comma  therefore  is  generally 
omitted,  and  the  cross-ratio  written  {ABCD}. 

Definition.     If  OA,  OB,  DC,  OD  be  a  pencil  of  four  lines,  the 
cross-ratio  of  the  pencil  is  defined  to  be 

sin  AOC      sin  AOD 

sin  COB  *  sin  DOB' 
the  sense  of  angles  being  taken  into  account  (see  p.  5) ;  the  cross- 
ratio  of  the  pencil  is  written  O  {AB,  CD}. 


126  CROSS-RATIO 

It  is  important  to  notice  that  the  cross-ratio  is  unaltered  if  we  substitute 
for  any  ray  of  the  pencil  (say  OB)  its  prolongation  backwards  through  O 
(say  OB'). 

For  z  COB'= /LCOB  +  180°  +  w.360^ 
L  D0B'=  l  DOB  +  180°  +  w.360°. 
sin  C0B'=  -  sin  COB,  sin  DOB'=  -sin  DOB. 

The  cross-ratio  is  therefore  unaltered.  In  fact,  the  cross-ratio  pertains 
to  the  four  complete  rays,  not  to  the  four  lialf-rmjs. 

Ex.  627.  In  Th.  28  it  was  shown  that  a  system  of  two  lines  and  the 
bisectors  of  the  angles  between  them  is  a  particular  case  of  a  harmonic 
pencil.  Prove  that  the  cross-ratio  of  such  a  pencil,  as  given  by  the  sine 
definition,  is  equal  to  -  1. 

The  cross-ratios  of  ranges  and  pencils  are  brought  into  relation 
by  the  following  fundamental  theorem. 


Theorem  50. 

The  cross-ratio  of  a  pencil  is  equal  to  the  cross-ratio 
of  the  range  in  which  any  transversal  cuts  that  pencil. 


fig.  71. 
To  prove  that  O  {AB,  CD}  =  {AB,  CD}. 

I.     As  regards  sign. 

sin  AOC  ,        ,,  .  AC 

—. has  the  same  sign  as  — ; 

sniCOB  ^  CB' 

sin  AC D  ,        ,,  .  AD 

— has  the  same  sign  as  —  . 

sin  DOB  ^  DB 

.*.  O  {AB,  CD}  has  the  same  sign  as  {AB,  CD] 


CROSS-RATIO 

II.     As  regards  magnitude. 

Draw  p  the  perpendicular  from  O  upon  A  BCD. 
A  ACC  =  1  OA  .  OC  sin  AOC, 
A  COB  =  1  DC  .  OB  sin  COB, 
AAOD  =  JOA.  ODsinAOD, 
A  DOB  =  J  OD  .  OB  sin  DOB. 
A  AOC       AAOD      sin  AOC      sinAOD 


127 


A  COB 

A  DOB      sin  COB 

sin  DOB 

-0{AB,  CC 

^}. 

Again, 

A  AOC  =  ^p  .  AC, 
ACOB  =  ijt?.CB, 

etc. 

,      A  AOC 

AAOD       AC 
A  DOB  ~CB 

AD 

*'     A  COB  ' 

*   DB 

=  {AB,  CD}. 

.*.  0{ab,  cd}  =  {ab,  cd}. 

Theorem  51. 

If  two  lines  cut  a  pencil  in  the  ranges  abcd,  a'b'c'd', 
then  {abcd}  =  {A'B'C'D'}. 


fig.  72. 
For  both  {ABCD}  and  {A'B'C'D'}  are  equal  to  O  {ABCD} 


128 


CROSS-RATIO 


Ex.  528.     Verify  graphically  the  truth  of  Th.  51. 

Ex.  529.  Prove  that,  while  the  cross-ratios  of  the  ranges  ABCD, 
A'B'C'D'  are  equal,  the  ratios  themselves  (AB  :  BC,  A'B'  :  B'C,  etc.)  are 
not  equal  unless  (1)  the  two  lines  meet  at  infinity,  or  (2)  O  is  at  infinity. 

Ex.  530.     If  a  transversal  be  drawn  parallel  to  the  ray  OD  of  a  pencil 
O  {ABCD},  and  cut  the  rays  OA,  OB,  OC  in  P,  Q,  R  respectively,  then 
PQ:  RQ  =  0  {AC,  BD}. 


,  Theorem  52. 

If  two  pencils  are  subtended  by  the  same  range,  then 
the  cross-ratios  of  the  pencils  are  equal. 


-AP 


\   ^\\/^^  ' 


y;\    ,z       w 


fig.  73. 

For  both  P  {XYZW}  and  Q  {XYZW}  are  equal  to  {XYZW}. 
Ex.  531.     Verify  graphically  the  truth  of  Th.  52. 
Ex.  532.     Examine  what  becomes  of  Th.  52,  if 

(i)     P  and  Q  are  at  infinity, 

(ii)    XYZW  is  the  line  at  infinity. 

Ex.  533.  Show  that  the  two  pencils  subtended  at  points  P,  Q  by  the 
same  range  XYZW  cannot  be  equiangular  unless  XYZW  is  the  line  at 
infinity. 

(It  may  be  noted  that,  if  XYZW  is  the  line  at  infinity,  PQXYZW  are 
concyclic,  as  a  straight  line  together  with  the  line  at  infinity  is  a  limiting 
form  of  a  circle.     But,  if  PQXYZW  are  concyclic,  z  XPY=:  z  XQY,  etc.) 


CROSS-RATIO 


129 


Ex.  534.     Consider  the  pencil  D  {AYCZ}  in  fig.  74  : 

(i)  It  is  cut  by  AB  ;  what  range  on  AB  is  equicross  with  {AYCZ}? 
(ii)  What  range  on  XE  is  equicross  with  {AYCZ}  ? 


fig.  74. 

Cross-ratio  of  a  pencil  of  parallel  lines. 

If  the  vertex  of  a  pencil  retreats  to  infinity,  the  rays  become 
parallel,  and  the  angles  of  the  pencil  become  zero.  By  the 
principle  of  continuity,  we  may  be  assured  that  all  transversals 
still  cut  the  pencil  in  equicross  ranges ;  this  property  is,  however, 
obvious  from  the  fact  that  any  two  transversals  are  divided 
similarly  by  a  pencil  of  parallel  lines. 

The  angles  of  the  pencil  being  zero,  it  would  not  appear,  at 
first  sight,  that  the  ordinary  definition  of  the  cross-ratio  of  a 
pencil  has  no  application  to  this  case.  This  difficulty  may  be 
avoided  by  defining  the  cross-ratio  of  a  pencil  of  parallel  lines  as 
the  cross-ratio  of  the  range  in  which  any  transversal  cuts  the 
pencil. 

We  may  use  the  property  Lt  — —  =  1  to  illustrate  the  case  of  a  pencil  of 

parallel  lines.    For  suppose  that  a  circle  be  drawn  with  centre  O  so  that 
the  pencil  intercepts  arcs  AB,  BC,  CD. 

A 
"C 


fig.  75. 


G.  S.   M.  G. 


130 


CROSS-RATTO 


As  O  retreats  towards  infinity,  let  the  radius  be  increased  and  the  angles 
be  diminished  in  such  a  way  that  the  arcs  remain  finite. 

sin  AOC /sin  AOD       /  AOC  /  z  AOD 


Then 


Lt 


COB 


DOB 


;/ 


zCOB/  z  DOB 
_  arc  AC  /arc  AD 
~  arc  CB/  arc^B  ' 

and  ultimately  the  ratios  of  the  arcs  become  the  ratios  of  the  segments  of  a 

transversal  line. 


Theorem  53. 

If  {abcd},  {a'b'c'd'}  be  two  equicross  ranges,  and  if 
A  A',  BB',  cC  be  concurrent,  then  dd'  must  pass  through 
the  point  of  concurrence. 


fig.  76. 

Let  O  be  the  point  of  concurrence  of  AA',  BB',  CC'. 
If  dd'  does  not  pass  through  O,  let  OD  cut  A'B'  in  D". 
Then  {A'B',  C'D"}  =  {AB,  CD} 

-  {A'B',  C'D'}. 
A'C' .  D"B'  _  A'C'  .  D'B' 
C'B'  .  A'D"  ~  C'B'  .  A'D' ' 
D"B'  _  D'B' 

*•  a^'~a'd" 

.*.    D"  coincides  with  D', 
.',    DP'  passes  through  O. 


CROSS-RATIO  131 

Note.  This  theorem  and  Theorem  51  could  be  stated  as 
theorem  and  converse.  It  must  be  carefully  noted  that  it  is 
generally  not  true  that,  if  {ABCD}  ^  {A'B'C'D'},  then  AA',  BB',  CC', 
DD'  are  concurrent. 


Ex.  535.     Examine  the  particular  case  in  which  {ABCD},  {A'B'C'D'} 
are  similar. 

Ex.  536.     Place  two  similar  ranges  {ABCD},  {A'B'C'D'}   in  such  a 
position  that  AA',  BB',  CC,  DD'  are  not  concurrent. 


Theorem  54. 

If  two  equicross  ranges  {pxyz},  {px'y'z'}  have  a  point 
p  in  common,  then  xx',  yy',  zz'  are  concurrent. 


This  is  a  particular  case  of  Theorem  53. 
Ex.  537.    Prove  this  theorem  without  assuming  Th.  53. 


9—2 


132 


CROSS-RATIO 


Theorem  55. 

If  p  {XYZW},  Q  {XYZW}  be  two  equicross  pencils,  and  if 
X,  Y,  z  be  coUinear,  then  w  is  on  the  line  XYZ. 


'.  78. 


If  W   does  not  lie  on    XYZ,  let    PW,  QW  cut  XYZ    in  A,   B 


pectively. 
Then 

{XY,  ZA}  =  P  {XY,  ZW} 

=  Q{XY,  ZW} 

=  {XY,  ZB}. 

.     XZ  .  AY       XZ  .  BY 
*    ZY.XA  "ZY.XB' 

AY       BY 
••    XA~XB' 

.*.   A  and  B  coincide, 
.-.   W  lies  on  XYZ. 


CROSS-RATIO  133 


Theorem  56. 

If  two  equicross  pencils  p  {abcd},  q  {abcd}  have  a  ray 
PQA  in  common,  then  BCD  are  collinear. 


fig.  79. 
This  is  a  particular  case  of  Theorem  55. 
Ex.  538.     Prove  Th.  56  without  assuming  Th.  55. 

Ex.  539.  Prove  that  in  fig.  77  the  intersections  of  XY',  X'Y  ;  of  XZ', 
X'Z  ;  of  YZ',  Y'Z  He  on  a  hne  through  P.  (Consider  two  of  the  above 
points.) 

Ex.  540.  Join  the  intersection  of  QB,  PC  to  that  of  QC,  PB  ;  that  of 
QB,  PD  to  that  of  QD,  PB  ;  that  of  QC,  PD  to  that  of  QD,  PC.  Prove  that 
these  three  Unes  meet  on  PQ. 


Cross-ratios  and  Projection. 

We  have  seen  that  angle  properties  as  a  rule  are  destroyed 
by  orthogonal  projection.  One  important  set  of  angle  relations, 
hovs^ever,  are  undisturbed ;  namely,  those  connected  with  cross- 
ratios.  The  reader  will  be  able  to  appreciate  the  importance  of 
cross-ratio  in  view  of  the  following  theorems. 

A  range  of  points  is  equicross  with  the  range  obtained 
by  projecting  these  points. 

A  pencil  of  lines  is  equicross  with  the  pencil  obtained 
by  projecting  these  lines. 

The  proofs  are  left  to  the  reader. 

It  follows  from  the  above  theorems  that  harmonic  properties 
of  points  and  lines  are  unaltered  by  projection. 


134  CROSS-RATIO 


Exercises  on  Chapter  XIII. 

Ex.  541.  Find  a  point  on  a  given  line  such  that  if  it  be  joined  to  three 
given  points  in  a  plane  with  the  line,  any  parallel  to  the  line  is  divided  in  a 
given  ratio  by  the  three  joins. 

Ex.  542.  Four  fixed  points  on  a  circle  subtend  at  a  variable 
point  on  the  circle  a  pencil  of  constant  cross-ratio. 

Ex.  543.  Four  fixed  tangents  to  a  circle  meet  a  variable  tangent 
to  the  circle  in  a  range  of  constant  cross-ratio. 

(Consider  the  pencil  subtended  at  the  centre.) 

Ex.  544.  If  four  points  are  collinear,  their  polars  vritb.  respect 
to  a  circle  are  concurrent;  the  cross-ratio  of  the  pencil  so  formed 
is  equal  to  that  of  the  range  formed  by  the  four  points. 

Ex.  545.  X  is  the  vertex  of  a  fixed  angle;  PAB  is  a  transversal  which 
turns  about  a  fixed  point  P  and  cuts  the  arms  of  the  angle  in  A,  B ;  O,  O' 
are  two  fixed  points  collinear  with  X.  OA,  O'B  meet  in  Q.  Prove  that  the 
locus  of  Q  is  a  straight  line. 

(Consider  a  pencil  formed  by  PX  and  three  positions  of  the  transversals 
PAiBi,  PA2B2,  PA3B3.) 

Ex.  546.  With  the  notation  of  the  preceding  exercise,  let  O,  O'  be  col- 
linear with  P  instead  of  X.  Prove  that  the  locus  of  Q  is  a  straight  line 
through  X. 

(Consider  a  pencil  formed  by  POO'  and  three  positions  of  the  trans- 
versal.) 

Ex.  547.  Prove  that  if  the  sides  of  the  triangle  O1O2O3  pass  through 
the  vertices  of  the  triangle  U1U2U3,  and  Ai  be  any  point  on  U2U3,  and  O3A1 
meet  Ui  U3  in  A2,  and  O2A1  meet  U1U2  in  A3,  then  Oi,  A2,  A3  are  collinear. 

(Consider  pencils  whose  vertices  are  Ai ,  U^.) 

Ex.  548.  Three  points  F,  G,  H  are  taken  on  the  side  BO  of  a  triangle 
ABC ;  through  G  any  line  is  drawn  cutting  AB  and  AC  in  L  and  M  re- 
spectively; FL  and  HM  intersect  in  K;  prove  that  K  lies  on  a  fixed  straight 
line  passing  through  A. 

Ex.  549.  The  three  sides  of  a  varying  triangle  ABC  pass  each  through 
one  of  three  fixed  collinear  points  P,  Q,  R.  Further,  A  and  B  move  along 
fixed  lines;  show  that  C  also  moves  on  a  fixed  line,  concurrent  with  the 
other  two. 


CROSS-RATIO  135 

Ex.  550.  A  straight  line  drawn  through  a  point  P  meets  two  fixed 
straight  lines  in  the  points  L  and  M.  The  straight  lines  joining  L  and  M 
to  a  point  Q  meet  the  fixed  straight  lines  again  in  the  points  M'  and  L'. 
Show  that  if  P  and  Q  are  fixed,  L'M'  passes  through  a  fixed  point. 

Ex.  551.  Show  that  the  lines  joining  the  centres  of  the  escribed  circles 
of  a  triangle  to  the  corresponding  vertices  of  the  pedal  triangle  are  con- 
current. 

Ex.  552.  Prove  that  the  lines  joining  the  centres  of  the  escribed  circles 
of  a  triangle  to  the  middle  points  of  the  corresponding  sides  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  553.  A',  B',  C  are  the  mid-points  of  the  sides  of  the  triangle  ABC, 
and  any  line  is  drawn  to  meet  the  sides  of  the  triangle  A'B'C  in  K,  L,  M. 
AK,  BL,  CM  meet  the  sides  of  ABC  in  K',  L',  M'  respectively.  Prove  that 
K'L'M'  is  a  straight  line. 

Ex.  554.  If  A',  B',  C  be  three  points  on  the  sides  of  a  triangle  ABC 
such  that  AB' .  BC .  CA'  =  AC  .  BA' .  CB'  and  X,  Y,  Z  be  the  mid-points  of 
B'C  C'A',  A'B',  then  AX,  BY,  CZ  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  555.  Two  points  X,  Y  separate  harmonically  each  of  the  three  pairs 
of  points  P  and  P',  Q  and  Q',  R  and  R'.     Prove  that 

{PP'QR}  =  {P'PQ'R'}. 


CHAPTEE    XIV. 

THE    PRINCIPLE    OF    DUALITY. 

THE    COMPLETE    QUADRILATERAL    AND 
QUADRANGLE. 

The  reader  may  have  noticed  that  there  exists  in  plane 
geometry  a  certain  duality,  by  which  many  properties  of  points 
have,  as  their  counterpart,  corresponding  properties  of  lines. 

For  instance : — 

2  points  define  1  line.  2  lines  define  1  point. 

3  points  define  3  lines.  3  lines  define  3  points. 

4  points  define  6  lines.  4  lines  define  6  points. 

etc.  etc. 

A  point  moving  under  cer-  A  line  moving  under  cer- 
tain conditions  defines  a  curve,  tain  conditions  defines  a  curve, 
the  locus.  the  envelope. 

If  a  point  lies  in   a  fixed  If    a    straight    line    passes 

line,  its  polar  with  respect  to  a  through  a  fixed  point,  its  pole 

circle    passes   through   a  fixed  with  respect  to  a  circle  lies  in 

point.  a  fixed  line. 

This  duality  has  obvious  limitations,  though  a  more  extended 
study  of  geometry  will  show  that  it  reaches  further  than  would 
appear  at  first  sight :  e.g.  there  would  at  first  sight  seem  to  be 
no  point-system  corresponding  with  a  line-system  of  two  lines  at 
right  angles. 


PRINCIPLE   OF   DUALITY 


137 


However,  there  are  many  cases  of  duality  that  may  be  cited 
at  this  stage. 

In  order  to  exhibit  the  matter  in  the  most  striking  way,  it  is 
convenient  to  use  two  new  terms  : — 

Definition.      The    join    of  Definition.     The   meet   of 

two    points    is    the    unlimited      two  lines  is  the  point  defined 
line  defined  by  the  two  points.       by    the    two    lines    (by    their 

intersection). 
It  is  also  convenient  to  denote  points  by  large  letters,  and 
lines  by  small  letters :  AB  is  the  join  of  points  A,  B ;  ah  is  the 
meet  of  lines  a,  h. 

Using  this  notation  : — 

I 


C/ 


■rp 


fig.  80. 


A  range  of  four  fixed  points 
A,  B,  C,  D  together  with  a 
varying  point  P  define  a  pencil 
of  constant  cross-ratio. 

If  two  equicross  ranges 
A  BCD,  A'B'C'D'  be  placed  so 
that  the  lines  A  A',  BB',  CC'  are 
concurrent,  then  DD'  will  be 
concurrent  with  these  three 
lines. 


A  pencil  of  four  fixed  lines 
a,  b,  c,  d  together  with  a  vary- 
ing line  p  define  a  range  of 
constant  cross-ratio. 

If  two  equicross  pencils 
abcd^  a'h'c'd'  be  placed  so  that 
the  points  aa\  bb\  cc'  are  col- 
linear,  then  dd'  will  be  collinear 
with  these  three  points. 


138 


COMPLETE   QUADRILATERAL 


An  interesting  case  is  that  of  the  complete  figures  defined  by 
four  lines  and  four  points. 

Definitions. 

Four    lines    together    with  Four  points  together  with 

their  six  meets  form  a  com-      their   six  joins    form    a   com- 
plete quadrilateral  (or  four-     plete    quadrangle    (or   four- 


line). 


point). 


fig.  83. 


fig.  82. 

The  four  lines  AB,  BC,  CD, 
DA  are  called  sides. 

The  meet  of  any  two  sides 
is  called  a  vertex ;  the  vertices 
are  the  six  points  A,  B,  C,  D, 
E,    F. 

Opposite  vertices  are  ver- 
tices that  do  not  lie  on  the 
same  side  (A,  C  ;   B,  D  ;   E,  F). 

The  join  of  two  opposite 
vertices  is  called  a  diagonal ; 
these  are  three  in  number,  AC, 
BD,  EF. 


The  four  points  ah,  be,  cd, 
da  are  called  vertices. 

The  join  of  any  two  vertices 
is  called  a  side;  the  sides  are 
the  six  lines  a,  b,  c,  d,  e,  f. 

Opposite  sides  are  sides 
that  do  not  pass  through  the 
same  vertex  (a,  c;  b,  d\  e,f). 

The  meet  of  two  opposite 
sides  is  called  a  diagonal- 
point;  these  are  three  in 
number,  ac,  bd,  ef. 


COMPLETE   QUADRILATERAL 


139 


We  will  now  prove  the  important  harmonic  property  of  the 

,  ,      fquadrilateral 
complete  i  ^     ,        ,       . 
^  (.quadrangle 

Before  proving  this,  it  should  be  noted  that 


If  ABCD  is  a  range  of  points 
and  P  a  point  not  lying  on  the 
same  line,  P  {ABCD}  signifies 
the  cross-ratio  of  the  pencil 
PA,   PB,    PC,    PD, 


If  abed  is  a  pencil  of  lines 
and  J)  a  line  not  passing  through 
the  same  point,  p  {abed}  signifies 
the  cross -ratio  of 
pa,  pb,  pe,  pd. 


the    range 


Theorem  57. 

In  a  complete  quadri- 
lateral, on  each  diagonal 
there  is  a  harmonic  range 
formed  by  its  meets  with 
the  other  two  diagonals  to- 
gether with  two  vertices  of 
the  quadrilateral. 

To  prove   {EF,   PQ}    a  har- 


Theorem  58. 

In  a  complete  quad- 
rangle, through  each  dia- 
gonal-point there  is  a  har- 
monic pencil  formed  by  its 
joins  to  the  other  two  dia- 
gonal-points together  with 
two  sides  of  the  quadrangle. 

To  prove  {ef,  pq]  a  harmonic 


{EF,  PQ}=B{EF,  PQ} 
=  {CA,  RQ} 
=  D  {CA,  RQ} 

^{FE,  PQ}^. 

Since  the  points  E,  F  have 
been  interchanged  without 
altering  the  value  of  the  cross- 
ratio,  {EF,  PQ}  is  harmonic. 


{^/,  P9]  =  ^  {e/,  pq} 

=  {c«,  rq} 
=  d{ca,  rq} 

=  {A  nV 

Since  the  lines  e,  f  have 
been  interchanged  without 
altering  the  value  of  the  cross- 
ratio,  [efj  pq}  is  harmonic. 


*  This  method  of  proof  may  be  remembered  as  follows :  the  range  on 
diagonal  1  is  projected  on  to  diagonal  2,  and  back  again  on  to  diagonal  1; 
using  the  two  vertices  that  lie  in  diagonal  3. 


140 


COMPLETE   QUADRILATERAL 


The  above  proof  is  of  interest  as  bringing  out  the  principle 
of  duality.  The  following  proof,  however,  may  be  preferred  for 
ordinary  purposes. 


fig.  84. 


Fig.   84  represents  a  com- 
plete quadrilateral. 

To  prove  that  {TU,  XY}  is  a 


harmonic  range. 


Fig.   85   represents  a  com- 
plete quadrangle. 

To  prove  that   Z  {QR,  TUj 
is  a  harmonic  pencil. 

Consider  the  triangle  STU. 

Since  SX,  TR,  UP  are  concurrent, 

TX     UR     SP 
UX  *  SR  '  f  P  ~  ~ 

Again,  since  P,  R,  Y  are  collinear, 

TY     UR     SP 
U Y  ■  SR  '  TP 


1. 


[Ce 


\^Menelaus. 


TX 
UX 


TY 
UY 


.*.    {TU,  XY}  is  a  harmonic  range. 
Hence  Z  {TU,  QR}  is  a  harmonic  pencil. 


COMPLETE   QUADRILATERAL  141 

Ex,  556.     Prove  the  above  theorem  for  the  other  two  diagonals  of  the 
quadrilateral,  and  for  the  other  two  diagonal  points  of  the  quadrangle. 

Ex.  557.   AB  is  parallel  to  DC  ;  AC,  BD  meet  in  Q  ;  DA,  CB  in  P.    Prove 
that  PQ  bisects  AB  and  DC. 

Ruler  construction  for  the  fourth  point  of  a  harmonic 
range. 


't 

/ 

m 

'< 

,Q\» 

^^ 

'   / 

\  "^ 

^^,^ 

^  ^  ^ 

:  / 

^ 

^  ^ 

X, 

/ 

^^ 

^~ 

N. 

8^ 

fig. 

C 

86. 

Given  three  coUinear  points  A,  B,  C ;  to  find  the  point  D  such 
that  {AC,  BD}  shall  be  harmonic. 

Through  A  draw  any  two  lines  AP,  AQ. 

Through  B  draw  any  line  BQP  cutting  the  two  former  lines 
in  Q  and  P  respectively. 

Join  CQ,  CP.     Let  these  joins  cut  AP,  AQ  in  R,  S  respectively. 

Join  RS  and  produce  it  to  meet  ABC  in  D. 

Then,  by  the  harmonic  property  of  the  quadrilateral  FRQS, 
{AC,  BD}  is  harmonic. 

Note.  This  ruler  construction  for  a  fourth  harmonic  point 
is  important,  as  showing  that  the  idea  of  a  harmonic  range  can 
be  developed  without  any  reference  to  measurements  of  lines  or 
angle;  in  other  words,  can  be  put  on  a  non-metrical  or  pro- 
jective basis. 


142  SELF-POLAR   TRIANGLE 

Ex.  558.  Perform  the  above  construction  for  the  point  D,  satisfying 
yourself  that  the  same  point  is  obtained  however  the  lines  AP,  AQ,  BQP  are 
varied. 

Ex.  559.  Bisect  a  line  AC  by  the  above  method.  [D  will  be  at  in- 
finity.] 

Ex.  560.  Show  that,  if  one  diagonal  of  a  complete  quadrilateral  is 
parallel  to  the  third  (the  exterior)  diagonal,  then  the  second  diagonal  bisects 
the  third. 

Ex.  561.  Apply  the  harmonic  property  of  the  quadrilateral  to  the  case 
of  the  parallelogram,  considering  all  three  diagonals. 


Self-polar  Triangle.  > 

The  reader  is  reminded  of  the  following  theorems  proved  in 
Chapter  vii. 

Th.  31.  If  a  straight  line  is  drawn  through  any  point 
to  cut  a  circle,  the  line  is  divided  harmonically  by  the 
circle,  the  point,  and  the  polar  of  the  point  with  respect 
to  the  circle. 

Th.  32.  If  the  polar  of  a  point  P  with  respect  to  a 
circle  passes  through  a  point  Q,  then  the  polar  of  Q 
passes  through  p. 

Th.  33.  Two  tangents  are  drawn  to  a  circle  from  a 
point  A  on  the  polar  of  a  point  B ;  a  harmonic  pencil  is 
formed  by  the  two  tangents  from  A,  the  polar  of  B  and 
the  line  ab. 

Ex.  562.  Let  the  polars  of  poinifs  A,  B,  C  form  a  triangle  PQR.  Prove 
that  the  polars  of  the  points  P,  Q,  R  are  the  sides  of  the  triangle  ABC. 

Ex.  563.  Draw  the  polar  of  a  point  A.  On  this  polar  take  a  point  B. 
Draw  the  polar  of  B,  passing  through  A  (why  ?)  and  cutting  the  polar  of  A 
in  C.  Prove  that  AB  is  the  polar  of  C  ;  i.e.  that  eacli  side  of  the  txiangle 
ABC  is  the  polar  of  the  opposite  vertex. 


SELF-POLAR    TRIANGLE  143 

Definition.  If  a  triangle  be  such  that  each  side  is  the  polar 
of  the  opposite  vertex  with  respect  to  a  given  circle,  the  triangle 
is  said  to  be  self-polar  or  self-conjugate  with  respect  to  the 
circle;  and  the  circle  is  said  to  be  polar  with  respect  to  the 
triangle. 

From  Ex.  563  it  is  seen  that  an  infinite  number  of  triangles  may  be 
drawn  self-polar  with  respect  to  a  given  circle.  One  vertex  may  be  taken 
anywhere  in  the  plane  ;  the  second  is  then  limited  to  a  certain  line ;  and 
when  the  second  is  fixed,  the  third  is  thereby  fixed. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  will  appear  from  Exs.  564, 565,  that  a  given  triangle 
has  only  one  polar  circle. 

Ex.  564.  The  centre  of  a  circle,  polar  with  respect  to  a  given  triangle, 
is  the  orthocentre  of  the  triangle. 

Ex.  565.  If  H  be  the  orthocentre  of  a  ABC,  and  AD,  BE,  CF  the  alti- 
tudes, then 

HA  .  HD  =  (rad.  of  polar  circle)  2, 
and  similarly 

HB  .  HEzr:(rad.  of  polar  circle) 2  =HC  .  HF, 

the  sense,  of  lines  being  taken  into  account, 

Ex.  566.  A  triangle  self-polar  with  respect  to  a  real  circle  cannot  be 
acute-angled. 

Ex.  567.     What  is  the  polar  circle  of  a  right-angled  triangle? 

Ex.  568.  An  isosceles  triangle  ABC  has  base  2a  and  vertical  angle  (A) 
120°.  Show  that  the  radius  of  the  polar  circle  is  a  ^^2.  If  the  polar  circle 
cuts  AC  in  P,  show  that  z  ABP  =  15°. 

Ex.  569.  Tlie  sides  of  a  triangle  are  divided  harmonically  by  its 
polar  circle. 

Ex.  570.     A  triangle  self-polar  with  respect  to  a  point-circle  is  right- 


Ex.  571.     What  does  a  self-polar  triangle  become  if  one  vertex  coincides 
with  the  centre  of  the  circle  ? 

Ex.  572.    If  a  circle  consists  of  a  straight  line  and  the  line  at  infinity, 
what  do  its  self -polar  triangles  become  ? 


144  SELF-POLAR  TRIANGLE 

Ex.  573.  The  angle  A  of  a  triangle  ABC  is  obtuse ;  AD,  BE,  CF  are  the 
altitudes  ;  H  the  orthocentre.  The  polar  circle  cuts  AC  in  P  and  Q.  Show 
that  EP2=  EA  .  EC,  and  that  H,  F,  P,  D,  B,  Q  are  concyclic. 

Ex.  574.  If  circles  are  described  in  the  sides  of  a  triangle  as  diameters, 
they  are  cut  orthogonally  by  the  polar  circle  of  the  triangle. 

Theorem  59. 

If  a  quadrangle  be  inscribed  in  a  circle,  the  triangle 
formed  by  the  diagonal  points  is  self-polar  with  respect 
to  the  circle. 


fig.  87. 

We  will  prove  that  the  side  TU  of  the  triangle  TUZ  is  the 
polar  of  the  vertex  Z. 

By  Theorem  58  T  {ZU,  SQ}  is  a  harmonic  pencil. 

.'.   the  pencil  is  cut  by  SQ  in  the  harmonic  range  {ZX,  SQ}. 

.*.    X  is  on  the  polar  of  Z.  Th.  31. 

Again,   T  {ZU,  SQ}    is    cut   by    PR    in    the   harmonic    range 
{ZY,   PR}. 

.-.   Y  is  on  the  polar  of  Z.  Th.  31. 

.*.    XY  or  TU  is  the  polar  of  Z. 
Similarly  it  may  be  shown  that  UZ  is  the  polar  of  T  and  ZT 
the  polar  of  U. 

Ex.  575.    Prove  in  detail  that  UZ  is  the  polar  of  T,  and  ZT  the  polar 
of  U. 


SELF-POLAR   TRIANGLE  145 


Theorem  60. 

If  a  quadrilateral  be  circumscribed  about  a  circle,  the 
triangle  formed  by  the  diagonals  is  self-polar  with  respect 
to  the  circle. 


fig.  88. 


We  will  prove  that  the  vertex  Z  of  the  triangle  XYZ  is  the 
pole  of  XY. 

By  Theorem  57,  {XZ,  QS}  is  a  harmonic  range. 

.'.    U  {XZ,  QS}  is  a  harmonic  pencil. 

.*.    UZ  passes  through  the  pole  of  UX.  Th.  33. 

Again,  T  {XZ,  QS}  is  a  harmonic  pencil. 

.*.   TZ  passes  through  the  pole  of  TX.  Th.  33. 

.*.    Z  is  the  pole  of  XY. 

Similarly  it  may  be  shown  that  X  is  the  pole  of  YZ,  and  Y 
the  pole  of  ZX. 

Ex.  676.     Prove  in  detail  that  X  is  the  pole  of  YZ,  and  Y  the  pole 
of  ZX. 

G.  S.    M.  G.  10 


146  TRIANGLES   IN   PERSPECTIVE 


Triangles  in  perspective. 


Definition.     Two  figures  are  said  to  be  in  perspective  if  the 
joins  of  corresponding  pairs  of  points  are  all  concurrent. 


Theorem  61. 
(Desargues'  Theorem*.) 

If  two  triangles  are  such  that  the  lines  joining  their 
vertices  in  pairs  are  concurrent,  then  the  intersections 
of  corresponding  sides  are  coUinear. 


C 


fig.  89. 

The  triangles  ABC,  A'B'C'  are  such  that  AA',  BB',  CC'  meet 
at  O. 

Let  BC,  B'C'  meet  at  P;  CA,  C'A'  at  Q  ;  AB,  A'B'  at  R.  Let 
OAA'  cut  BC  in  S,  B'C'  in  S'. 

*  Gerard  Desargues  (born  at  Lyons,  1593  ;  digd,  1662). 


TRIANGLES   IN   PERSPECTIVE  147 

To  'prove  that  PQR  is  a  straight  line. 

{PBSC}  ^  {PB'S'C'}  as  both  ranges  lie  on  the  pencil  O  {PBSC}. 

.-.    A  {PBSC}  =  A' {PB'S'C}, 

i.e.  A{PROQ}-A'{PROQ}. 

These  two  equicross  pencils,  therefore,  have  a  line  OAA'  in 
common. 

.'.    P,  Q,  R  are  collinear.  Th.  56. 

Definition.  The  point  O  is  called  the  centre  of  perspective, 
and  the  line  PQR  the  axis  of  perspective  of  the  two  triangles 
ABC,  A'B'C'  in  fig.  89. 

Ex.  577.  Prove  Th.  61  by  considering  equicross  pencils  with  vertices 
at  B  and  B'  (instead  of  A  and  A'). 

Ex.  678.  Investigate  whether  Th.  61  can  be  extended  to  the  case  of 
polygons  in  perspective. 

Ex.  579.  Prove  Th.  61  for  the  case  in  which  the  triangles  ABC,  A'B'C 
are  not  in  the  same  plane.  Hence  prove  the  theorem  for  coplanar  triangles 
by  rotating  the  line  OAA'  about  O  till  it  comes  into  the  plane  OBB'CC. 

Ex.  580.  Prove  Th.  61  by  considering  fig.  89  as  the  representation  in 
piano  of  three  planes  meeting  at  O  and  cut  by  the  planes  ABC,  A'B'C. 

Ex.  681.    Prove  the  converse  of  Th.  61. 

Ex.  682.  Prove  that  triangles  that  are  similar  and  similarly  situated 
(i.e.  sides  parallel)  are  in  perspective.    Where  is  the  axis  of  perspective  ? 

Ex.  583.     Investigate  whether  Ex.  582  can  be  extended  to  polygons. 

Ex.  684.  Consider  the  case  of  triangles  that  are  congruent  and 
similarly  situated. 


10—2 


148  PRINCIPLE   OF   DUALITY 

Note  on  Three-dimensional  Geometry. 

The  dual  relation  of  point  and  line  is  confined  to  two- 
dimensional  geometry. 

In  three  dimensions,  the  point  corresponds  to  the  plane,  the 
line  occupying  an  intermediate  position. 

Thus: 

Two  points  determine  a  line.  Two  planes  determine  a  line. 

Three   points   determine   a  Three   planes   determine   a 

plane,   unless   they  are  all   on  point,  unless  they  all   contain 

the  same  line.  the  same  line. 

Two    lines,    in    the    same  Two  lines,  through  the  same 

plane,  determine  a  point.  point,  determine  a  plane. 

A  point  and  a  line  deter-  A  plane  and  a  line  deter- 
mine a  plane,  unless  the  line  mine  a  point,  unless   the    line 
passes  through  the  point.        --^  lies  in  the  plane, 
etc.  etc. 

Again,  consider  the  five  regular  solids.  They  may  be  grouped 
as  follows : 

Tetrahedron  (3  corners,  6  edges,  3  faces). 

Cube  (8C,  12E,  6f).  Octahedron  (8F,  12E,  6c). 

Dodecahedron  (20C,  30E,  12f).      Icosahedron  (20F,  30E,  12C). 

The  point-plane  correspondence  appears  very  clearly  when 
we  take  stock  of  the  cross-ratio  properties  of  three  dimensions. 

We  should  begin  with  the  definitions  of : 

(1)  Cross-ratio  of  four  points  on  the  same  line  (a  range  of 
points). 

(2)  Cross-ratio  of  four  planes  containing  the  same  line  (a 
sheaf  of  planes),  this  being  defined  by  means  of  the  angles  between 
the  planes. 


PRINCIPLE   OF   DUALITY  149 

In  addition  there  would  be  the  definition  of  the 

(3)     Cross-ratio  of  four  lines,  in  a  plane,  through  a  point  (a 
pencil  of  lines). 

There  would  then  follow  a  number  of  theorems  such  as  the 
following : 

The  joins  of  a  point  to  the  .    The  intersections  of  a  plane 

four  points  of  a  range  give  a  with  the  four  planes  of  a  sheaf 

pencil  equicross  with  the  range.  give  a  pencil  equicross  with  the 

sheaf. 

The  planes  determined  by  The  points   determined   by 

a  line  and  the  four  points  of  a  a  line  and  the  four  planes  of  a 

range   give   a   sheaf    equicross  sheaf   give    a    range    equicross 

with  the  range.  with  the  sheaf. 

The  proofs  of  the  theorems  may  be  left  to  the  reader,  who 
will  find  that  these  principles  admit  of  further  development*. 


Exercises  on  Chapter  XIY. 

Ex.  585.  A  straight  line  meets  the  sides  BC,  CA,  AB  of  a  triangle  in 
the  points  P,  Q,  R  respectively;  BQ  and  CR  meet  at  X  and  AX  meets  BC 
at  P'.   Show  that  P  and  P'  are  harmonic  conjugates  with  respect  to  B  and  C. 

If  X  is  the  orthocentre  of  ABC,  show  that  XP  is  perpendicular  to  the 
straight  line  joining  A  to  the  middle  point  of  BC. 

Ex,  586.  The  collinear  points  ADC  are  given;  CE  is  any  other  fixed 
line  through  C,  E  is  a  fixed  point  and  B  is  any  moving  point  on  CE.  The 
lines  AE,  BD  intersect  in  Q;  the  lines  CQ,  DE  in  R  ;  and  the  lines  BR,  AC 
in  P.     Prove  that  P  is  a  fixed  point  as  B  moves  along  CE. 

Ex.  587.  If  a  line  drawn  through  the  intersection  O  of  the  diagonals  of 
a  quadrilateral  cuts  one  pair  of  opposite  sides  in  P,  P',  so  that  OP=P'0, 
and  cuts  the  other  pair  in  Q,  Q',  show  that  PQ=Q'P'. 

*  See  Reye's  Geometry  of  Position,  translated  by  Holgate  (the  Macmillan 
Company). 


150  NOTE   ON   THREE-DIMENSIONAL  GEOMETRY 

Ex.  588.  Perpendiculars  at  B,  C  to  the  sides  BA,  CA  of  a  triangle  ABC 
meet  the  opposite  sides  in  P,  Gt ;  and  the  tangents  to  the  circumcircle  at  B, 
C  meet  in  R.     Prove  that  P,  Q,  R  are  collinear. 

Ex.  589.  A  quadrilateral  is  such  that  pairs  of  opposite  sides  have  the 
same  sum.  If  O  be  the  orthocentre  of  the  triangle  formed  by  the  diagonals, 
then  O  is  also  the  in-centre  of  the  quadrilateral. 

Ex.  590.  Two  tangents  to  a  circle  are  fixed;  two  others  are  drawn  so  as 
to  form  with  the  two  fixed  tangents  a  quadrilateral  having  two  opposite 
sides  along  the  fixed  tangents ;  show  that  the  locus  of  the  intersection  of 
internal  diagonals  of  this  quadrilateral  is  a  straight  line,  and  find  its 
position. 

Ex.  591.  ABCD  is  a  quadrilateral  inscribed  in  a  circle  whose  centre  is 
O;  AB,  CD  intersect  in  E;  AD,  BC  intersect  in  F;  AC,  BD  intersect  in  G. 
Prove  that  OG  is  perpendicular  to  EF;  and  that  BC,  AD  subtend  equal 
angles  at  the  foot  of  the  perpendicular  from  O  upon  EF. 

Ex.  592.  Prove  that  the  circle  on  each  of  the  diagonals  of  a  quadri- 
lateral as  diameter  is  orthogonal  to  the  polar  circle  of  each  of  the  four 
triangles  formed  by  the  sides  of  the  quadrilateral. 

Ex.  593.  Prove  that  the  midpoints  of  the  diagonals  of  a  complete 
quadrilateral  are  collinear. 

(Let  ABCDEF  be  the  quadrilateral;  EF  being  the  third  diagonal.  Let 
P,  Q,  R  be  the  mid-points  of  AC,  BD,  EF.  Prove  that  as  PQE,  PQF  are 
each  I  of  the  quadrangle  ABCD, ) 

Ex.  594.  ABC,  A'B'C,  A"B"C",  are  three  triangles  in  perspective,  and 
BC,  B'C,  B"C"  are  parallel.  Prove  that  the  line  joining  the  intersections 
of  AB,  A'B',  and  AC,  A'C,  is  parallel  to  the  line  joining  the  intersections  of 
A'B',  A"B",  and  A'C,  A"C". 

Ex.  595.  The  lines  EF,  FD,  DE  which  join  the  points  of  contact  D, 
E,  F  of  the  inscribed  circle  of  a  triangle  with  the  sides  cut  the  opposite  sides 
X,  Y,  Z.     Prove  that  the  mid-points  of  DX,  EY,  FZ  are  collinear. 

Ex.  596.  Show  that  in  a  complete  quadrangle  the  three  sides  of  the 
harmonic  triangle  are  met  by  the  sides  of  the  quadrangle  in  6  points,  other 
than  the  vertices  of  the  harmonic  triangle,  which  lie  by  threes  on  four 
straight  lines. 


MISCELLANEOUS    EXERCISES. 

Ex.  597.  ABC  is  a  triangle  ;  D,  E,  F  are  the  feet  of  the  perpendiculars. 
Prove  that,  if  the  triangles  FBD,  EDC  are  equal  in  area,  AB  is  equal  to  AC. 

Ex.  598.  In  a  given  circle  show  how  to  inscribe  a  triangle  ABC  such 
that  the  angle  ABC  is  given  and  the  sides  AB,  AC  pass  through  given 
points. 

Ex.  599.  From  a  fixed  point  A  straight  lines  ABC,  AEF  are  drawn  to 
meet  two  fixed  lines  in  B,  C  and  E,  F.  Prove  that  the  circles  circumscribing 
the  triangles  ABE,  ACF  intersect  at  a  constant  angle. 

Ex.  600.  The  perpendiculars  drawn  to  the  sides  of  a  triangle  at  the 
points  in  which  they  are  touched  by  the  escribed  circles  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  601.  Three  circles  have  two  common  points  O  and  C,  and  any 
straight  line  through  O  cuts  them  in  points  P,  Q,  and  R.  Prove  that  the 
circumscribing  circle  of  the  triangle  formed  by  the  tangents  at  P,  Q,  R  passes 
through  O'. 

Ex.  602.  Draw  a  straight  line  from  the  vertex  A  of  a  triangle  ABC 
meeting  BC  in  P  so  that  AP2=BP.  CP,  considering  the  cases  in  which  P 
(i)  is,  (ii)  is  not,  situated  between  B  and  C. 

Ex.  603.  A,  B,  C,  D  are  four  points  in  a  plane:  points  P,  Q,  R  are 
taken  in  AD,   BD,  CD  respectively  such  that 

AP  :  PD  =  BQ  :  QDzzzCR  :  RD  . 

Show  that  the  three  lines  joining  P,  Q,  R  to  the  middle  points  of  BC,  CA, 
AB  respectively  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  604.  Prove  that  the  locus  of  the  middle  points  of  the  sides  of  all 
triangles  which  have  a  given  orthocentre  and  are  inscribed  in  a  given  circle 
is  another  circle. 

Ex.  606.  A  straight  line  drawn  parallel  to  the  median  AD  of  an  isosceles 
triangle  ABC  whose  angle  A  is  a  right  angle  cuts  the  sides  AB,  AC  in  P  and 
Q.  Show  that  the  locus  of  M,  the  intersection  of  BQ,  CP,  is  a  circle;  and 
that,  if  N  is  the  middle  point  of  PQ,  M  N  touches  this  circle. 

Ex.  606.  A  straight  line  drawn  through  the  vertex  of  a  triangle  ABC 
meets  the  lines  DE,  DF,  which  join  the  middle  point  D  of  the  base  to  the 
middle  points  E,  F  of  the  sides,  in  X,  Y  ;  show  that  BY  is  parallel  to  CX. 


152  MISCELLANEOUS   EXERCISES 

Ex.  607.  The  points  of  contact  of  the  escribed  circles  with  the  sides 
BC,  CA,  AB  produced  when  necessary,  are  respectively  denoted  by  the  letters 
D,  E,  F  with  suffixes  1,  2  or  3  according  as  they  belong  to  the  escribed  circle 
opposite  A,  B  or  C.  BEg,  CFg  intersect  at  P;  BEj,  CF^  at  Q;  EgFg  and 
BC  at  X  ;  FgDj  and  CA  at  Y  ;  D^  E^  and  AB  at  Z.  Prove  that  the  groups 
of  points  A,  P,  Dj,  Q  ;  and  X,  Y,  Z  ;  are  respectively  collinear. 

Ex.  608.  The  opposite  sides  of  the  hexagon  ABCDEF  are  parallel,  and 
the  diagonal  CF  is  parallel  to  the  sides  AB  and  DE;  BC,  AF  intersect  in 
P,  CD,  EF  in  Q,  and  BD,  AE  in  R;  show  that  P,  Q,  R  are  in  one  straight 
line. 

Ex.  609.  Show  that,  if  O  be  any  point  on  the  circumcircle  of  the 
triangle  ABC,  and  OL  be  drawn  parallel  to  BC  to  meet  the  circumcircle  in 
L,  then  will  LA  be  perpendicular  to  the  pedal  line  of  O  with  respect  to  the 
triangle. 

Ex.  610.  ABC  is  a  triangle  inscribed  in  a  circle,  and  tangents  to  the 
circle  at  A,  B,  C  cut  BC,  CA,  AB  respectively  in  the  points  A',  B^^C. 
Show  that  the  middle  points  of  A  A',  BB',  CC  lie  on  the  radical  axis  of 
the  circumcircle  and  nine-points  circle. 

Ex.  611.  If  ABC  is  a  triangle  and  DEF  its  pedal  triangle,  the  perpen- 
diculars from  A,  B,  C  upon  EF,  FD,  DE  respectively  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  612.  ABC  is  a  triangle  right-angled  at  C.  The  bisector  of  the  angle 
A  meets  BC  in  D,  the  circumcircle  in  G,  and  the  perpendicular  to  AB 
through  the  circumcentre  in  F.  Prove  that  2FG  =  AD.  Hence  (or  other- 
wise) construct  a  right-angled  triangle,  given  the  hypotenuse  and  the  length 
of  the  line  drawn  bisecting  one  of  the  acute  angles  and  terminated  by  the 
opposite  side. 

Ex.  613.  A  point  O  is  taken  within  an  equilateral  triangle  ABC  such 
that  the  angles  AOB,  BOC,  CCA  are  in  the  ratios  3:4:5.  AD  is  drawn 
perpendicular  to  BC,  and  CD  is  joined.  Show  that  each  of  the  triangles 
into  which  ADC  is  divided  by  OA,  CD,  OC  is  similar  to  one  of  the  triangles 
into  which  ABC  is  divided  by  OA,  OB,  OC. 

Ex.  614.  Two  circles  intersect  in  the  points  B,  D  ;  a  straight  line  ABC 
cuts  the  circles  in  A,  C;  AD,  CD  cut  the  circles  again  in  P,  Q ;  AQ,  CP 
meet  in  R  ;  prove  that  DPQR  is  a  cyclic  quadrilateral. 

Ex.  615.  If  S,  S'  are  the  centres  of  similitude  of  two  circles,  prove  that 
the  circles  subtend  equal  angles  at  any  point  on  the  circle  whose  diameter  is 
SS'. 

Ex.  616.  A  circle  S  passes  through  the  centre  of  another  circle  S'; 
show  that  their  common  tangents  touch  S  in  points  lying  on  a  tangent  to  S'. 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXERCISES  153 

Ex.  617.  Three  circles  have  two  common  points  O  and  O',  and  any 
straight  Hne  through  O  cuts  them  in  points  P,  Q,  R.  Prove  that  the  circum- 
scribing circle  of  the  triangle  formed  by  the  tangents  at  P,  Q,  R  passes 
through  O'. 

Ex.  618.  A  quadrilateral  A  BCD  is  inscribed  in  a  circle,  and  through  a 
point  E  on  AB  produced  a  straight  line  EFG  is  drawn  parallel  to  CD  and 
cutting  CB,  DA  produced  in  F,  G  respectively.  Show  how  to  draw  the 
circle  that  passes  through  F  and  G  and  touches  the  given  circle. 

Ex.  619.  In  a  triangle  AiBjC^  a  circle  is  inscribed,  touching  the  sides  in 
A2B2C2 ;  and  so  on.  Find  the  values  of  the  angles  of  the  triangle  A^B„C„,  and 
give  a  construction  for  the  directions  of  the  sides  when  n  is  made  infinite. 

Ex.  620.  The  lines  WAX,  XBY,  YCZ,  ZDW  bisect  the  exterior  angles 
of  the  convex  quadrilateral  ABCD.  Show  that  an  infinite  number  of  quadri- 
laterals can  be  inscribed  in  XYZ  W  whose  sides  are  parallel  respectively  to  the 
sides  of  ABCD,  and  whose  perimeters  are  equal  to  the  perimeter  of  ABCD. 

Ex.  621.  A,  B,  C  are  three  given  points.  Show  how  to  describe  a  square 
having  one  vertex  at  A  so  that  the  sides  opposite  to  A  shall  pass  through  B,  C 
respectively. 

Ex.  622.  Any  point  P  is  taken  on  the  base  BC  of  a  triangle  ABC,  and  a 
line  PL  parallel  to  BA  meets  AC  in  L,  while  a  line  PM  parallel  to  CA  meets 
AB  in  M.  Show  that  the  triangle  PLM  is  a  mean  proportional  between  the 
triangles  BMP,  PLC. 

Ex.  623.  GAB  is  a  triangle.  Any  circle  through  A,  B  meets  OA  at  P 
and  OB  at  Q.  PQ  meets  AB  at  X,  PB  meets  AQ  at  Y.  Find  the  locus  of  Y, 
and  show  that  XY  passes  through  a  fixed  point. 

Ex.  624.  Prove  that  the  radical  axes  of  a  fixed  circle  and  the  several 
circles  of  a  coaxal  system  meet  in  a  point.  State  the  theorems  which  may 
be  obtained  by  inverting  this  theorem  with  respect  to  (i)  a  limiting  point, 
(ii)  a  point  of  intersection  of  the  coaxal  circles,  (iii)  any  other  point  in  the 
plane. 

Ex.  625.  A  trapezium  ABCD  has  the  opposite  sides  AB,  CD  parallel. 
Shew  that  the  common  chord  of  the  circles  described  on  the  diagonals  AC, 
BD  as  diameters  is  perpendicular  to  AB  and  CD,  and  concurrent  with  AD 
and  BC. 

Ex.  626.  Given  three  points  A,  B,  C  on  a  circle,  determine  geometrically 
a  fourth  point  D  on  the  circle,  such  that  the  rays  PC,  PD  may  be  harmonic 
conjugates  with  respect  to  the  rays  PA,  PB,  where  P  is  any  point  in  the  circle. 

Show  further  that  the  intersection  of  AC,  BD,  that  of  AB,  CD,  that  of 
the  tangents  at  A  and  D,  and  that  of  the  tangents  at  B  and  C  are  collinear. 

ID— 5 


154  MISCELLANEOUS    EXERCISES 

Ex.  627.  Find  the  locus  of  the  centre  of  a  circle  which  bisects  the 
circumferences  of  two  given  circlefe. 

Ex.  628.  O  is  the  radical  centre  of  three  circles.  Points  A,  B,  C  are 
taken  on  the  radical  axes  and  AB,  BC,  CA  are  drawn.  Prove  that  the  six 
points  in  which  these  meet  the  three  given  circles  lie  on  a  circle. 

If  radii  vectores  are  drawn  from  O  to  these  six  points  they  meet  the 
three  given  circles  in  six  points  on  a  circle  and  its  common  chords  with  the 
three  circles  meet  in  pairs  on  OA,  OB,  OC. 

Ex.  629.  On  a  given  chord  AB  of  a  circle  a  fixed  point  C  is  taken,  and 
another  chord  EF  is  drawn  so  that  the  lines  AF,  BE  and  the  line  joining  C  to 
the  middle  point  of  EF  meet  in  a  point  O ;  show  that  the  locus  of  O  is  a 
circle. 

Ex.  630.  If  O  be  the  centroid  of  the  n  points  A,  B,  C,.,.  and  if  P  be 
any  variable  point,  then  A  P^  +  B  P'-^  +  C  P^^  +  . . .  =  ?i .  O  P-  +  constant. 

If  ABC...  be  a  regular  polygon  inscribed  in  a  circle,  O  the  centre,  and  P 
any  point  on  the  circumference  of  this  circle,  then  the  centroid  of  the  feet  of 
the  perpendiculars  from  P  on  OA,  OB,  OC,  ...will lie  on  a  fixed  circle. 

Ex.  631.  If  A,  B,  C  are  three  collinear  points  and  P  is  any  point  what- 
ever, prove  that  BC  .  PA^  +  CA  .  PB-'  +  AB  .  PC^^  -  BC  .  CA  .  AB.  Find  the 
radius  of  the  circle  which  touches  the  circles  described  on  AB,  BC,  AC  as 
diameters. 

Ex.  632.  Prove  that  the  tangents  to  the  circumcircle  of  the  triangle 
ABC  at  the  vertices  meet  the  opposite  sides  in  collinear  points. 

Ex.  633.  If  L,  L'  are  the  limiting  points  of  a  family  of  coaxal  circles, 
prove  that  any  circle  through  L,  L'  cuts  the  family  orthogonally,  and  that  if 
PP'  is  a  diameter  of  this  circle,  then  the  polars  of  P  with  respect  to  the 
family  pass  through  P'. 

Ex.  634.  A  line  drawn  through  L,  a  limiting  point  of  a  coaxal  system 
of  circles,  cuts  one  of  the  circles  at  A  and  B.  The  tangents  at  A  and  B  cut 
another  circle  of  the  system  at  P,  Q  and  R,  S  respectively.  Shew  that  PR 
and  QS  subtend  equal  angles  at  L. 

Ex.  635.     P,   Q  are  any  two  points;    PM   is  drawn  perpendicular  to 
the  polar  of  Q  with  respect  to  a  circle,  and  QN   is  drawn  perpendicular 
to  the  polar  of  P ;  if  O  is  the  centre  of  the  circle,  prove  that 
PM:QN  =  OP:OQ. 


MISCELLANEOUS    EXERCISES  155 

Ex.  636.  If  P  be  the  extremity  of  the  diameter  CP  of  any  circle  through 
L,  C,  where  L,  L',  C,  C  are  the  limiting  points  and  centres  of  two  fixed 
circles  and  L  lies  within  the  circle  with  C  as  centre,  then  the  polar  of  P  with 
regard  to  the  circle  with  C  as  centre  passes  through  a  fixed  point. 

Ex.  637.  A  chord  of  a  fixed  circle  is  such  that  the  sum  of  the  squares 
of  the  tangents  from  its  extremities  to  another  fixed  circle  is  constant ; 
prove  that  the  locus  of  its  middle  point  is  a  straight  line. 

Ex.  638.  A  circle  touches  two  given  circles  in  P  and  P',  and  intersects 
their  radical  axis  in  Q  and  Q'.  Prove  that  PP'  passes  through  one  of  the 
centres  of  similitude  of  the  given  circles,  and  that  the  tangents  at  Q  and  Q' 
are  parallel  to  a  pair  of  common  tangents  of  the  given  circles. 

Ex.  639.  State  (without  proof)  the  chief  properties  of  any  geometrical 
figure  which  persist  after  inversion.  If  Gl,  Q'  are  inverse  points  with  respect 
to  a  circle  B,  and  R,  R'  are  the  inverse  points  of  Q,  Q'  with  respect  to  an 
orthogonal  circle  C,  prove  that  R,  R'  are  inverse  points  with  respect  to  the 
circle  B. 

Ex.  640.  Two  circles  intersect  in  A  and  B,  and  a  variable  point  P  on 
one  circle  is  joined  to  A  and  B,  and  the  joining  lines,  produced  if  necessary, 
meet  the  second  circle  in  Q  and  R.  Prove  that  the  locus  of  the  centre  of 
the  circle  circumscribing  PQR  is  a  circle. 

Ex.  641.  Two  squares  have  a  common  angular  point  at  A  and  their 
angular  points  taken  in  order  the  same  way  round  are  respectively  A,  B,  C,  D 
and  A,  B',  C,  D'.     Prove  that  the  lines  BB',  CC,  and  DD'  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  642.  A,  B,  A',  B'  are  given  points,  and  PQ  is  a  given  straight  line. 
Find  points  C,  C  in  PQ  such  that  the  area  of  the  triangles  ABC,  A'B'C 
shall  be  equal,  and  CC  shall  be  of  a  given  length. 

Ex.  643.  The  middle  points  of  the  sides  of  a  plane  polygon  A  are  joined 
in  order  so  as  to  form  a  second  polygon  B  ;  prove  that  about  this  polygon  B 
either  an  infinite  number  of  polygons  other  than  A,  or  no  other  can  be  cir- 
cumscribed with  their  sides  bisected  at  the  corners  of  B,  according  as  the 
number  of  sides  is  even  or  odd. 

Ex.  644.  A  circle  is  inscribed  in  a  triangle  ABC  touching  the  sides  at 
P,  Q,  R.  Show  that  the  diameter  of  the  circle  through  P,  the  line  QR,  and 
the  line  joining  A  to  the  middle  point  of  BC,  are  concurrent. 


156  MISCELLANEOUS    EXERCISES 

Ex.  645.  A  common  tangent  touches  two  circles  in  P  and  Q  re- 
spectively ;  show  that  P  and  Q  are  conjugate  points  *  with  regard  to  any 
coaxal  circle. 

Ex.  646.  If  one  pair  of  opposite  vertices  of  a  square  is  a  pair  of  con- 
jugate points  with  respect  to  a  circle,  so  will  be  the  other  pair. 

Ex.  647.  Having  given  two  non-intersecting  circles;  draw  the  longest 
and  the  shortest  straight  line  from  one  to  the  other,  parallel  to  a  given 
straight  line. 

Ex.  648.  POP',  QOQ'  are  two  chords  of  a  fixed  circle  and  O  is  a  fixed 
point.  Prove  that  the  locus  of  the  other  intersection  of  the  circles  POQ, 
P'OQ'  is  a  second  fixed  circle. 

Ex.  649.  The  points  Q  and  R  lie  on  the  straight  line  AC  and  the 
point  V  on  the  straight  line  AD  ;  VQ  meets  the  straight  line  AB  in  Z,  and 
VR  meets  AB  in  Y:  X  is  another  point  on  AB  :  XQ  meets  AD  in  U,  and  XR 
meets  AD  in  W.     Prove  that  YU,  ZW,  AC  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  650.  The  opposite  sides  of  the  hexagon  ABCDEF  are  parallel,  and 
the  diagonal  CF  is  parallel  to  the  sides  AB  and  DE  ;  BC,  AF  intersect  in  P, 
CD,  EF  in  Q,  and  BD,  AE  in  R  ;  show  that  P,  Q,  R  are  in  one  straight 
line. 

Ex.  661.  A,  B  are  two  fixed  points,  and  a  variable  circl|  through  them 
cuts  a  fixed  circle  in  C,  D.  Prove  that  the  line  joining  the  intersections  of 
AC,  BD  and  AD,  BC  passes  through  a  fixed  point. 

Ex.  652.  Having  given  six  points  A,  B,  C,  A',  B',  C  such  that  A'B  is 
parallel  to  AB',  B'C  is  parallel  to  BC,  and  C'A  is  parallel  to  CA',  prove  that 
if  A' B'C  are  collinear,  ABC  also  are  collinear. 

Ex.  653.  The  angles  APB,  AQB  subtended  at  two  variable  points  P,  Q 
by  two  fixed  points  A,  B  differ  by  a  constant  angle,  and  the  two  ratios  AP/BP, 
AQ/BQ  are  proportionals.  Show  that  if  P  describes  a  circle,  Q  describes 
either  a  circle  or  a  straight  line. 

Ex.  654.  A  straight  line  drawn  through  the  vertex  of  a  triangle  ABC 
meets  the  lines  DE,  DF,  which  join  the  middle  point  D  of  the  base  to  the 
middle  points  E,  F  of  the  sides  in  X,  Y  ;  show  that  BY  is  parallel  to  CX. 

*  Two  points  are  said  to  be  conjugate  with  respect  to  a  circle  if  the 
polar  of  each  point  passes  through  the  other. 


MISCELLANEOUS    EXERCISES  157 

Ex.  655.  Prove  that,  if  in  a  plane  the  ratio  of  the  distances  from  two 
points  be  the  same  for  each  of  three  points  A,  B,  and  C,  the  two  points  are 
inverse  points  with  regard  to  the  circle  ABC.  Prove  also  that  the  line 
bisecting  BC  at  right  angles  meets  the  lines  BA  and  CA  in  two  such  points. 

Ex.  656.  If  a  circle  S  touch  the  circumcircle  of  a  triangle  ABC  at  P, 
prove  that  the  tangents  to  S  from  A,  B,  C  are  in  the  ratios  AP  :  BP  :  CP. 
What  does  this  result  become  when  the  radius  of  the  circle  S  increases 
indefinitely  ? 

Ex.  657.  PQ  and  RS  are  interior  and  exterior  common  tangents  to  two 
circles.  The  circles  QSR  and  SRP  cut  PQ  atp,  q  respectively;  and  the 
circles  PQS,  PQR  cut  RS  at  r,  s  respectively.  Shew  that  circles  will  pass 
through  Q,  S,  q,  s  and  through  P,  R,  p,  r,  and  that  the  rectangle  contained 
by  their  radii  equals  the  rectangle  contained  by  the  radii  of  the  original 
circles. 

Ex.  658.  A  triangle  of  given  shape  is  inscribed  on  a  given  triangle. 
Shew  that  the  locus  of  its  centroid  is  in  general  six  straight  lines. 

Ex.  659.  A  circle  U  of  constant  radius  is  described,  having  its  centre  at 
any  point  of  the  circumference  of  a  fixed  circle  whose  centre  is  O ;  the 
variable  circle.  U  cuts  another  fixed  circle  V ;  Y  is  the  foot  of  the  per- 
pendicular from  O  on  the  common  chord  of  U  and  V.  Prove  that  the  locus 
of  Y  is  a  circle. 

Ex.  660.  If  two  fixed  circles  be  cut  by  a  variable  straight  line  in  four 
points  in  a  harmonic  range,  show  that  the  product  of  the  perpendiculars 
upon  it  from  the  centres  of  the  circles  is  constant. 

Ex.  661.  Through  any  point  O  in  the  plane  of  a  triangle  ABC  is  drawn 
a  transversal,  cutting  the  sides  in  P,  Q,  R.  The  lines  OA,  OB,  OC  are 
bisected  in  A',  B',  C  ;  and  the  segments  QR,  RP,  PQ  of  the  transversal 
are  bisected  in  P',  Q',  R'. 

Show  that  the  three  lines  A'P',  B'Q',  C'R'  are  concurrent. 

Ex.  662.  The  four  points  A  BCD  form  a  quadrilateral  of  which  the 
diagonals  AC,  BD  intersect  in  O,  and  A',  B',  C,  D'  are  the  inverse  points 
with  regard  to  O  as  origin  of  A,  B,  C,  D  respectively.  Show  that  A'B'C'D' 
is  a  quadrilateral  having  its  angles  supplementary  to  those  of  A  BCD  and 
that,  if  turned  over,  it  may  be  placed  in  the  plane  so  as  to  have  sides  and 
diagonals  parallel  to  those  of  A  BCD. 


158  MISCELLANEOUS    EXERCISES 

Ex.  663.  If  from  any  point  on  the  circumference  of  a  circle  perpen- 
diculars are  drawn  to  the  four  sides  and  to  the  diagonals  of  an  inscribed 
quadrilateral,  prove  that  the  rectangle  contained  by  the  perpendiculars  on 
either  pair  of  opposite  sides  is  equal  to  that  contained  by  the  perpendiculars 
on  the  diagonals. 

Ex.  664.  If  a  system  of  circles  be  drawn  so  that  each  bisects  the  cir- 
cumferences of  two  given  circles,  then  the  polars  of  a  given  point  with 
respect  to  the  system  of  circles  will  be  concurrent. 

Ex.  665.  A  line  is  drawn  cutting  two  non-intersecting  circles ;  find  a 
construction  determining  two  points  on  this  line  such  that  each  is  the 
point  of  intersection  of  the  polars  of  the  other  point  with  respect  to  the 
two  circles. 

Ex.  666.  If,  on  the  sides  BC,  CD  of  a  quadrilateral  ABCD  of  which 
two  opposite  angles  at  B  and  D  are  equal  (the  other  two  opposite  angles 
being  unequal)  points  E  and  F  be  taken  such  that  the  areas  of  the  triangles 
AED,  AFB  are  equal,  prove  that  the  radical  axis  of  the  circles  on  BF,  ED 
as  diameters  passes  through  A. 

Ex.  667.  Two  opposite  sides  of  a  quadrilateral  inscribable  in  a  circle 
lie  along  two  given  lines  OX,  OY  and  the  intersection  of  the  diagonals  is 
given;  show  that  the  locus  of  the  centres  of  the  circles  is  a  straight  line. 

Ex.  668.  Two  circles  intersect  orthogonally  at  a  point  P,  and  O  is  any 
point  on  any  circle  which  touches  the  two  former  circles  at  Q  and  Q'. 
Show  that  the  angle  of  intersection  of  the  circumcircles  of  the  triangles 
OPQ,  OPQ'  is  half  a  right  angle. 

Ex.  669.  The  triangles  AiBjCi,  A0B2C2  are  reciprocal  with  respect  to  a 
given  circle;  BgCg,  C^A^  intersect  in  P^  and  B^Cj,  C^/K^  in  Pg.  Show  that 
the  radical  axis  of  the  circles  which  circumscribe  the  triangles  P^A^Bg, 
PgAgBj^  passes  through  the  centre  of  the  given  circle. 

Ex.  670.  Show  that  if  each  of  two  pairs  of  opposite  vertices  of  a  quadri- 
lateral is  conjugate  with  regard  to  a  circle  the  third  pair  is  also ;  and  that 
the  circle  is  one  of  a  coaxal  system  of  which  the  line  of  coUinearity  of  the 
middle  points  of  the  diagonals  is  the  radical  axis. 


intersection  of  Cg  and  C.,  passes  through  the  centre  of  C^,  and  the  chord 
of  intersection  of  C3  and  C^  through  the  centre  of  C^ ;  show  that  the  chord 
of  intersection  of  C^  and  C.^  passes  through  the  centre  of  C3. 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXERCISES  159 

Ex.  672.  A  system  of  spheres  touch  a  plane  P  (on  either  side  of  the 
plane)  at  a  point  O.  A  plane  Q,  not  passing  through  O,  cuts  P  in  the  line  I, 
touches  two  of  the  spheres  in  L^  and  L2  respectively,  and  cuts  the  other 
spheres.  Show  that  the  system  of  circles  in  which  Q  cuts  the  spheres  is 
coaxal,  with  L^  and  L2  as  limiting  points  and  I  as  radical  axis. 

Ex.  673.  Show  that  the  locus  of  a  point  at  which  two  given  portions  of 
the  same  straight  line  subtend  equal  angles  is  a  circle. 

Ex.  674.  Two  variable  circles  touch  each  of  two  fixed  circles  and  each 
other ;  show  that  the  locus  of  the  point  of  contact  of  the  variable  circles  is 
a  circle. 

Ex.  675.  A,  B,  C,  D  are  four  circles  in  a  plane,  each  being  external  to 
the  other  three  and  touching  two  of  them.  Show  that  the  four  points  of 
contact  are  concyclic. 

Ex.  676.  Three  circles  meet  in  a  point  O.  The  common  chord  of  the 
first  and  second  passes  through  the  centre  of  the  third,  and  the  common 
chord  of  the  first  and  third  passes  through  the  centre  of  the  second.  Prove 
by  inversion  with  respect  to  O  that  the  common  chord  of  the  second  and 
the  third  passes  through  the  centre  of  the  first. 

Ex.  677.  AOB  is  a  right-angled  triangle,  O  is  the  right  angle,  and  OL 
is  the  perpendicular  to  AB.  On  the  other  side  of  OB  remote  from  A  the 
square  OBGF  is  described,  and  the  line  AG  cuts  OL  in  M.     Prove  that 

OM~AB"^OL* 

Ex.  678.  If  A,  B  are  conjugate  points  with  respect  to  a  circle  (see  note 
to  Ex.  899),  then  the  tangent  to  the  circle  from  O,  the  mid-point  of  AB,  is 
equal  to  OA. 

Ex.  679.  The  sides  BC,  DA  of  the  quadrilateral  ABCD  are  cut  by  any 
line  in  the  points  K,  L  respectively.  AC,  BD  meet  in  X;  AK,  BL  meet  in 
Y;  CL,  DK  meet  in  Z  and  BC,  AD  meet  in  E.     Prove  that 

X  {KCZD}  =  {EALD}  =  X  {KCYD}, 

and  that  XYZ  is  a  straight  line. 


INDEX. 


Angles  of  intersection  of  curves  76 
Anharmonic  ratio  123 
Apollonius'  circle  78 
Apollonius'  theorem  20 
Axis,  radical  87 

Base  of  range  123 

Centre  of  inversion  100 

Centre  of  similitude  73 

Centre,  radical  90 

Centroid  11 

Centroid  of  triangle  30 

Ceva  46 

Chord  of  contact  62 

Circle  of  Apollonius  78 

Circle  of  infinite  radius  10,  69 

Circle  of  inversion  100 

Circum-centre  22 

Circum-circle  22 

Coaxal  circles  87 

Collinear  22 

Complete  quadrangle  138 

Complete  quadrilateral  138 

Concurrent  22 

Conjugates,  harmonic  53 

Constant  of  inversion  100 

Contact  problems  83 

Cross-ratio  54 


Cross-ratio  of  pencil  125 
Cross-ratio  of  pencil  of  parallel  lines 

129 
Cross-ratio  of  range  123 
Cross-ratios  and  projection  133 


Theorem  146 
Diagonal  of  quadrilateral  138 
Diagonal-point  of  quadrangle  138 
Duality  136 

Ellipse  119 
Equicross  123 
Escribed  circle  24 
Ex-centre  24 
Ex-circle  24 

Figures  in  perspective  146 

Harmonic  conjugates  53 
Harmonic  pencil  58 
Harmonic  progression  54 
Harmonic  range  53,  141 
Harmonic  section  53 

In-centre  23 
In-circle  23 
Infinity  6 
Inverse  points  100 


162 


INDEX 


Inversion  100 
Inversion,  centre  of  100 
Inversion,  circle  of  100 
Inversion,  constant  of  100 
Inversion,  radius  of  100 

Join  of  points  137 


Pole  62,  63 

Principle  of  duality  136 

Projection  114 

Projective    construction    for 

harmonic  141 
Ptolemy  80 
Ptolemy's  Theorem  80 


fourth 


Limiting  points  94 
Line  at  infinity  9 


Quadrangle  138 
Quadrilateral  138 


Medial  triangle  29 
Median  29 
Meet  of  lines  137 
Menelaus  49 


Kadieal  axis  87 
Kadical  centre  90 
Kadius  of  inversion 
Bangs  123 


100 


Nine-points  centre  36 
Nine-points  circle  35 
Notation  for  triangle  16 

Orthocentre  31 
Orthogonal  circles  76 
Orthogonal  projection  114 

Parallel  translation  84 
Peaucellier's  Cell  104 
Pedal  triangle  32 
Pencil  56,  123 
Pencil,  harmonic  58 
Perspective  146 
Point  at  infinity  7 
Points,  limiting  94 
Polar  62,  63 
Polar  circle  143 


Salmon's  theorem  70 
Self-conjugate  triangle  143 
Self-polar  triangle  143 
Sense  of  a  line  1 
Sense  of  an  angle  5 
Similarly  situated  72 
Similitude  71 
Similitude,  centre  of  73 
Simson  line  37 

Theorem  of  Apollonius  20 
Theorem  of  Ceva  46 
Theorem  of  Menelaus  49 
Transversal  of  pencil  56 
Triangle  16 

Vertex  of  pencil  56,  123 


CAMBRIDGE  :     PRINTED   BY   JOHN    CLAY,    M.A.    AT    THE    UNIVERSITY   PRESS. 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made 
4  days  prior  to  due  date 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 
— JUN  1  0  2003 


DD20  15M  4-02 


k     jIi^ 


918303 

G6 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY